manualshive.com logo in svg

Avaya Communication Manager, Administrator'S Manual, Page: 1693 / 1854

Share
Download
Avaya Communication Manager Administrator'S Manual Download Page 1693

Feature Reference

Telephone displays

Administrator’s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager

1693

November 2003

Enhanced Abbreviated Dialing -user defined

INVALID GROUP 
- TRY AGAIN

GROUPE ERRONE - 
REESSAYER

GRUPPO NON VALIDO - 
RIPETERE

GRUPO NO 
VALIDO - 
INTENTE DE 
NUEVO

THANK YOU - DO 
NOT DIST ENTRY 
CONFIRMED

MERCI - DEMANDE 
EST CONFIRMEE

NON DISTURBARE - 
RICHIESTA 
CONFERMATA

NO MOLESTAR - 
ENTRADA 
CONFIRMADA

THANK YOU - DO 
NOT DIST 
REQUEST 
CANCELED

MERCI - DEMANDE 
EST ANNULEE

NON DISTURBARE - 
RICHIESTA 
CANENTRYATA

MUCHAS 
GRACIAS - 
SOLICITUD 
CANCELADA

Table 76: Field separator

English

French

Italian

Spanish

<calling party> "to" 
<called party>

<calling party> "a" 
<called party>

<calling party> "a" 
<called party>

<calling 
party> "a" 
<called party>

Table 75: Do Not Disturb (Hotel/Motel feature)  2 of 2

English

French

Italian

Spanish

  2 of 2

display display-messages ad-programming

Page 1 of 1

Language Translations

     English

 1. Press button to program.         1. ****************************************
 2. Change number?                   2. ***********************
 3. Yes=1 No=2                       3. ****************
 4. Enter number:                    4. ****************************************
 5. Press # to save.                 5. ****************
 6. Number saved.                    6. ****************************************
 7. Change label?                    7. ***********************
 8. Enter label:                     8. ****************************************
 9. Press  * to advance; # to save.  9. ******************************
10. Press  * to reenter; # to save. 10. ******************************
11. Label saved.                    11. ****************************************

Summary of Contents for Communication Manager

Page 1: ...Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager Volumes 1 2 and 3 555 233 506 Issue 7 November 2003...

Page 2: ...ntly innocuous tampering Harm such as harmful tampering data loss or alteration regardless of motive or intent Be aware that there may be a risk of unauthorized intrusions associated with your system...

Page 3: ...th Part 68 of the FCC rules On either the rear or inside the front cover of this equipment is a label that contains among other information the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number RE...

Page 4: ...ation of Conformity SDoC Avaya Inc in the United States of America hereby certifies that the equipment described in this document and bearing a TIA TSB 168 label identification number complies with th...

Page 5: ...29 Logging into the System 29 Accessing the S8700 Media Server 30 Logging in with Access Security Gateway 34 Logging off the System 35 Setting Command Permissions 36 Establishing Daylight Savings Rule...

Page 6: ...inistration 80 3 Managing Phones 81 Installing New Phones 81 Adding New Phones 82 Using Templates to Add Phones 85 Using an Alias 86 Customizing Your Phone 87 Upgrading Phones 88 Swapping Phones 88 Us...

Page 7: ...isplay Language 160 Setting up Directory Buttons 162 7 Handling Incoming Calls 163 Setting up Basic Call Coverage 163 Setting up Advanced Call Coverage 166 Setting up Call Forwarding 172 Setting up Ni...

Page 8: ...g Avaya Communication Manager for Telecommuting 303 Setting up Personal Station Access 305 Creating a Station Security Code 307 Assigning an Extender Password 308 Setting up Call Forwarding 309 Assign...

Page 9: ...SIP trunk group 364 Removing Trunk Groups 366 Adding Trunks to a Trunk Group 366 Removing trunks from a trunk group 368 Inserting and Absorbing Digits 369 Administering Trunks for Listed Directory Num...

Page 10: ...n Active Calls 408 Using Phones as Intercoms 409 Setting up Automatic Answer Intercom Calls 412 Observing Calls 414 15 Managing Data Calls 417 Types of Data Connections 417 Data Call Setup 417 Alphanu...

Page 11: ...Billing Information 503 Collecting Information About Calls 503 Recording Calls Between Users on the Same Server 505 Tracking Calls by Account Code 506 Forcing Users to Enter Account Codes 507 Receivin...

Page 12: ...ersion Table 607 Abbreviated Dialing List 610 Access Endpoint 619 Administered Connection 624 Alias Station 628 Alphanumeric Dialing Table 629 Announcements Audio Sources 631 ARS Toll Table 638 Attend...

Page 13: ...Pack 778 Extended Pickup Group 799 Extensions Administered to have an MCT Control Button 800 Feature Access Code 801 Feature Related System Parameters 816 Group Paging Using Speakerphone 877 Holiday T...

Page 14: ...bers 1066 Mode Code Related System Parameters 1066 Modem Pool Group 1070 Multifrequency Signaling Related Parameters 1076 Music Sources 1099 Packet Gateway Board 1101 Partition Routing Table 1103 Pers...

Page 15: ...l Plan Table 1327 Vector Directory Number 1330 Volume 3 21 Feature Reference 1339 AAR and ARS partitioning 1339 AAR ARS Dialing without FAC 1340 Abbreviated dialing 1345 Access Security Gateway 1347 A...

Page 16: ...tion 1412 Call coverage 1417 Call detail recording 1433 Call forwarding 1479 Call park 1485 Calling party number restriction 1487 Call Pickup 1488 Call waiting termination 1492 CLAN and processor CLAN...

Page 17: ...t 1592 Listed Directory Numbers 1593 Look ahead routing 1594 Loss plans 1596 Loudspeaker paging 1597 Malicious Call Trace 1601 Misoperation Handling 1605 Modem pooling 1607 Multifrequency signaling 16...

Page 18: ...displays 1682 Temporary Bridged Appearance 1711 Tenant Partitioning 1712 Terminating Extension Group 1720 Terminal Translation Initialization 1722 Time of Day Routing 1725 Time of Day Clock Synchroniz...

Page 19: ...s document both as a guide to completing administrative procedures and as a reference document If you are interested in information about a particular task screen or feature use the index or table of...

Page 20: ...rmation on Multimedia Call Handling MMCH which enables users to control voice video and data transmissions using a telephone and PC Chapter 10 Setting Up Telecommuting provides information on system w...

Page 21: ...alled or other tasks that must be completed before starting the task Instructions Begins with a short introduction to set up an example then provides step by step numbered instructions on how to compl...

Page 22: ...TY CSI DEFINITY G3si Avaya Communication Manager on an Avaya DEFINITY Server SI hereafter called DEFINITY SI DEFINITY G3r Avaya Communication Manager on an Avaya DEFINITY Server R hereafter called DEF...

Page 23: ...a Communication Manager Contact Center Guide to ACD Contact Centers 555 233 516 Welcome to the Avaya S8300 Media Server and Avaya G700 Media Gateway 555 234 200 Avaya MultiVantage CallVisor ASAI Techn...

Page 24: ...vaya DEFINITY AUDIX System Switch Administration for the embedded AUDIX System Switch Administration for AUDIX Voice Messaging DEFINITY Line Side ISDN Primary Rate Interface Technical Reference Highli...

Page 25: ...terminal to refer to phones We show commands and screens from the newest Communiation Manager and refer to the most current books Please substitute the appropriate commands for your system and refer t...

Page 26: ...demarks are the property of their respective owners How to get this book on the web If you have internet access you can view and download the latest version of the Administrator s Guide for Avaya Comm...

Page 27: ...ns 1 800 225 7585 Avaya National Customer Care Center Support Line for help with maintenance and repair 1 800 242 2121 Avaya Toll Fraud Intervention 1 800 643 2353 International Technical Assistance C...

Page 28: ...think Let us know what you like or do not like about this book Although we cannot respond personally to all your feedback we promise we will read each response we receive Write to us at Avaya Inc Prod...

Page 29: ...For instructions on how to change your password see Changing Passwords on page 337 When not using the system log off for security purposes Instructions Logging into the system This procedure provides...

Page 30: ...terminal The Login prompt displays 2 Complete the steps for Logging into the System on page 29 For information about setting up remote administration contact your Avaya representative Failed log ins...

Page 31: ...her by connecting directly to the services port on the media server or connecting over the customer s network Connected to the services port To use the media server web interface 1 Open either the Net...

Page 32: ...the server that is active Once connected you can administer the media server using three tools Media server web interface for server specific administration and call processing features Avaya Site Ad...

Page 33: ...SA click Start Programs Avaya Site Administration ASA supports a terminal emulation mode which is directly equivalent to using SAT commands on a dumb terminal or through a Telnet session ASA also supp...

Page 34: ...d you need to know your personal identification number ASG The Access Security Gateway Key must be pre programmed with the same secret key such as ASG Key ASG Passkey or ASG Mobile assigned to the Ava...

Page 35: ...n application before switching to another software package Instructions To log off 1 Type logoff and press ENTER If the Facility Test Call or Remote Access features are administered Alarm origination...

Page 36: ...st For example if you want a user to be able to add and change stations but not VDNs you can enter y in the Administer Stations field and the Additional Restrictions field Then on page 2 or 3 enter vd...

Page 37: ...try later After the users have completed logging in or out the terminal is available for use NOTE Non superusers may change their password with permission set by the superuser However once a password...

Page 38: ...eld b Type April in the Month field c Type 1 in the Date field d Type 2 00 in the Time field e Type 1 00 in the Increment field This information specifies the day month date and time and increment at...

Page 39: ...t Setting the system date and time Update the date and time for events such as a leap year the change to or from daylight savings time or a system restart after a power failure The correct date and ti...

Page 40: ...700 IP Connect S8700 Multi Connect S8700 Media Server Windows is used in S8100 Media Server with a CMC1 Media Gateway S8100 Media Server with an Avaya G600 Media Gateway For additional information see...

Page 41: ...003 Instructions NOTE These instructions are for Avaya DEFINITY R DEFINITY CSI and DEFINITY SI servers For additional information see Avaya Communication Manager Contact Center Guide to ACD Contact Ce...

Page 42: ...n 42 Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager November 2003 3 Click Time Synchronization The Time Synchronization Properties screen displays 4 Click in the Offset box The Plus and Minus r...

Page 43: ...he Time Synchronization Properties screen displays 6 Click Plus to add hours to the remote station located to the west of the system time or click Minus to subtract hours to the remote station located...

Page 44: ...System Basics Setting Time of Day Clock Synchronization 44 Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager November 2003 8 Click NEXT The Time Synchronization Schedule displays...

Page 45: ...ory click SCHEDULE The Scheduler screen displays 10 In the Date field highlight each object and use the pull down menu to select the desired setting 11 In the Time field highlight each item of time an...

Page 46: ...ization Summary screen displays 16 If the time synchronization description is satisfactory click FINISH If the time synchronization is not satisfactory click BACK and revise the necessary information...

Page 47: ...u enter 14 00 You cannot update Second it automatically resets to 0 when you save your changes a Type 20 in the Hour field b Type 30 in the Minute field 8 30 p m c Type standard in the Type field d Ty...

Page 48: ...ou log in the system alerts you if you have any messages on the bulletin board and the date of the latest message Also if Avaya personnel post high priority messages while you are logged in you receiv...

Page 49: ...a personnel and are noted with an asterisk The second and third pages each have 20 lines and you can enter text on any line The system automatically enters the date the message was posted or last chan...

Page 50: ...ation command writes two time stamped identical copies of the translation data to the selected memory card disk or tape The save writes one complete copy first then writes the second copy in a differe...

Page 51: ...on a DEFINITY Server CSI or Communication Manager on a DEFINITY Server SI verify the memory card translation ID matches the translation ID of your server s Flash PROM Instructions In our example we sa...

Page 52: ...nouncements on page 378 for information about backing up announcements for your system See Restoring Announcements on page 380 for information about restoring announcements to your system Backup via t...

Page 53: ...rm immediate backups Schedule multiple backups Restore backups Access last scheduled backup information View contents of backup location NOTE As you navigate the backup and restore screens the main me...

Page 54: ...cation Manager November 2003 3 Click Backup NOTE When backing up to a LAN address a shared drive must be installed on a non Avaya S8100 Media Server After you click Backup the following screen display...

Page 55: ...Avaya Communication Manager 55 November 2003 Backing up to a LAN address You can back up your data to a LAN address using the Other locations feature To back up data to a LAN address 1 Click Other lo...

Page 56: ...o return to the Immediate backup screen 5 Select items to back up and select Backup Viewing scheduled backups To view scheduled backups 1 Click Scheduled Backups The following screen displays From thi...

Page 57: ...the list 1 On the Current list of scheduled backup jobs screen click Add new schedule The following screen displays 2 Select backup destination either to a LAN address or a PCMCIA Flash Disk 3 Select...

Page 58: ...cil symbol next to the scheduled backup you want to change The Changing this backup schedule displays 3 Make any changes as appropriate and click Submit The Current list of scheduled backups displays...

Page 59: ...de for Avaya Communication Manager 59 November 2003 Checking the contents of a backup 1 To view contents click Contents of backup location The following screen displays 2 Scroll to the location of bac...

Page 60: ...he restore source from the Source pull down menu The source is the media and or location of the backup data It could be a network or shared drive location or the pcmcia flash card 3 Select items to re...

Page 61: ...indicate unused ports that are available for you to administer These may also appear as p or t depending on settings in your system You will find many places in the administration interface where you...

Page 62: ...ur system s dial plan The following figure shows an example of a simple dial plan The Dial Plan Analysis Table defines the dialing plan for your system The Call Type column in the Dial Plan Analysis T...

Page 63: ...our example feature access codes can begin with or and are 3 digits long The Dial Plan Analysis Table works with the Dial Plan Parameters Table for fully defining your dial plan The Dial Plan Paramet...

Page 64: ...buted server This feature is available beginning with Communication Manager release 2 0 For example in a department store with many locations each location might have had its own switch with a multipl...

Page 65: ...only possible for signaling groups for remote offices or the ways described for IP phones determines the location Other options for the dial plan You can establish a dial plan so that users only need...

Page 66: ...allow you to proceed until you change one of them Tip To remove any feature access code merely delete the existing FAC and leave the field blank Controlling the Features Your Users Can Access Avaya C...

Page 67: ...ameters that are associated with some of the system features For example you can use the system parameters to allow music to play if callers are on hold or to allow trunk to trunk transfers on the sys...

Page 68: ...sec WAN facilities Mbit sec WAN facilities Explicit number of connections No limit It is highly recommended that you have the following design information before setting the bandwidth limits and mappi...

Page 69: ...TER 2 The IP Network Region screen appears 3 Scroll to page 3 of the form Inter Network Region Connection Management 4 In the codec set field enter the number 1 7 of the codec set to be used between t...

Page 70: ...an announcement you recorded earlier 6 In the DID Tie ISDN Intercept Treatment field type attd 7 This allows the attendant to handle incoming calls that have been denied 8 In the Invalid Number Dialed...

Page 71: ...after a hunt group or Automatic Call Distribution ACD split delayed announcement Music on Hold may sound distorted when played to IP trunks or to IP phones through certain codecs particularly the G 72...

Page 72: ...to the Hardware Guide for Avaya Communication Manager for more information about required hardware Your Avaya representative can help you administer this hardware Instructions In this example we are...

Page 73: ...change the Attendant Console screen so that this attendant is in group 2 This tenant s callers will hear classical music on hold Receiving Notification in an Emergency If one of your users calls an e...

Page 74: ...er that end users dial to reach emergency services 3 In the Total Min and Max fields type 4 In this example the user must dial all 4 digits for the call to be treated as an emergency call 4 In the Rou...

Page 75: ...iren by pushing the crisis alert button If you have set the system so that only one user needs to respond this stops the alerting at all phones If all users must respond each phone continues to alert...

Page 76: ...ant Console use the change attendant command Digital telephone set use the change station command The ARS Digit Analysis Table must have emergency numbers in the Call Type column set to alrt crisis al...

Page 77: ...save your changes Related topics Refer to Crisis Alert on page 1505 for more detailed information Other Useful Settings There are many settings that control how your system operates and how your user...

Page 78: ...ct calls For example if the user has activated send all calls or call forwarding you can administer the system to play a special dial tone when the user goes off hook See Distinctive ringing on page 1...

Page 79: ...AC field is set to y on the System Parameters Customer Options screen Note that you cannot have both Change COR by FAC and Tenant Partitioning enabled Be sure that each user who you want to allow to c...

Page 80: ...d enter 12344321 This field determines whether or not Communication Manager requires the user to enter a password when they try to change their COR Avaya recommends that you require a password 7 Press...

Page 81: ...ne Activation CTA Enabled field is y and the TTI Enabled field is y Complete the Station screen for the new phone and type x in the port field Note that the phone type must match the board type For ex...

Page 82: ...ormation Adding New Phones When you are asked to add a new phone to the phone system what do you do first To connect a new phone you need to do three things find an available port wire the port to the...

Page 83: ...the system printer that you use for scheduled reports type list configuration station schedule immediate and press ENTER 5 Choose an extension number for the new phone The extension you choose must n...

Page 84: ...nd indicates which features you want to enable on the phone To access the Station screen for the new phone 1 Type add station nnnn and press ENTER where nnnn is the extension for the new phone Make su...

Page 85: ...press ENTER nnnn is the extension of the station screen you want to duplicate to use as a template Verify that this extension is the one you want to duplicate 2 Press CANCEL to return to the command p...

Page 86: ...odems or other analog device If you purchase a phone model that is newer than your system you can alias this phone to an available model type that best matches the features of your new phone See your...

Page 87: ...monitor or test the system so that you can troubleshoot the system from your phone It will be much easier to monitor and test your system if you have a phone with a large multi button display such as...

Page 88: ...7410 phone and you want to replace it with a new 8411D phone 1 Type change station 4556 and press ENTER The Station screen for 4556 appears 2 Overwrite 7410 with 8411D in the Type field Now you can a...

Page 89: ...stores its own part ID comcode and serial number as does the 2420 telephone ACTR uses the stored information and associates the phone with new port when the phone is moved ACTR is an enhancement to Te...

Page 90: ...er extension are dropped unless the call is active on a bridged appearance at some other phone held calls remain in a hold state any calls ringing on either extension instantly proceed to the next poi...

Page 91: ...feature carefully its unauthorized use may cause you security problems For example someone who knows the TTI security code could disrupt normal business functions by separating telephones or data term...

Page 92: ...destroy your hardware if you attempt to connect an analog telephone to a digital port To merge an extension to a telephone with TTI complete the following steps from the telephone you want to merge 1...

Page 93: ...ed and cannot be added In that case a telephone cannot be added BRI endpoints are only counted as one TTI port For example for every two BRI endpoints one TTI port is counted As such you can have two...

Page 94: ...al Status screen appears 2 Make sure that the phone is plugged into the jack is idle not making or receiving calls has no messages waiting has no active buttons such as Send All Calls or Call Forwardi...

Page 95: ...r assignment at a later date Once you successfully remove a set that set is permanently erased from system memory If you want to reactivate the set you have to add it again as though it were a new pho...

Page 96: ...server The signaling path is carried over an IP network and the voice path is carried over the standard circuit switched telephone network PSTN Since you are using a phone for audio you do not need an...

Page 97: ...re that your system has been enabled to use IP Softphones Display the System Parameters Customer Options screen and verify the following field settings Maximum Concurrently Registered IP Stations is g...

Page 98: ...re 4 In the Security Code field enter the password for this remote user such as 1234321 This password can be 3 8 digits in length 5 In the Media Complex Ext field type 3000 This is the H 323 extension...

Page 99: ...password for this remote user such as 1234321 This password can be up to 7 digits in length 4 In the IP Softphone field type y 5 On page 2 in the Service Link Mode field type as needed Set this field...

Page 100: ...y numbers for emergency services when dialing from remote locations Avaya Inc is not responsible or liable for any damages resulting from misplaced emergency calls made from an Avaya endpoint Your use...

Page 101: ...n phone you can remove the connection that is no longer used for that phone To remove the H 323 connection that is no longer needed first record the media complex extension number 1 Type change statio...

Page 102: ...TER The Usage screen shows where the extension is used in the system 7 Press CANCEL 8 If the extension appears on the Usage screen access the appropriate feature screen and delete the extension For ex...

Page 103: ...Messages n BCC Type Security Code TN 1 Port Coverage Path 1 COR 1 Name Coverage Path 2 STATION OPTIONS Loss Group 2 Personalized Ringing Pattern 3 Data Module n Message Lamp Ext 1014 Speakerphone 2 wa...

Page 104: ...ompleted If not contact your Avaya representative Maximum Administered Remote Office Trunks Maximum Administered Remote Office Stations Product ID registration limit Remote Office IP station ISDN PRI...

Page 105: ...Tip Use status remote office to verify that your server running Communication Manager recognizes the Remote Office information It also displays the extensions and signaling group you administer next c...

Page 106: ...ng group Each Remote Office has own listen port and signaling group Set up a new trunk group or use an existing trunk group administered for H 323 signaling add trunk group next Page 1 of x TRUNK GROU...

Page 107: ...e R300 7 In the Near end Listen Port field type a port number in the 5000 9999 range 8 In the Far end Listen Port field type 1720 See Getting Started with the Avaya R300 Remote Office Communicator for...

Page 108: ...UDP Port Min 2048 UDP Port Max 3049 RTCP Reporting Enabled y RTCP MONITOR SERVER PARAMETERS DIFFSERV TOS PARAMETERS Use Default Server Parameters y Call Control PHB Value 34 Server IP Address Audio PH...

Page 109: ...Instructions 1 Type add station nnnn and press ENTER where nnnn is the extension you are adding The Station screen appears change ip network region 3 Page 3 of 19 Inter Network Region Connection Manag...

Page 110: ...Communication Manager via TFTP over a TCP IP connection This eliminates the need to physically remove the telephone and send it to the factory for the firmware update This feature is available on all...

Page 111: ...tp server and press ENTER to view the status of the file transfer A File download successful message appears when the file transfer completes It also displays the file size and the file name in memory...

Page 112: ...aded 7 Place the phone on hook within 4 seconds after the confirmation tone The phone is placed in a busy out state not able to make or receive calls and displays Firmware Download in Progress the amo...

Page 113: ...access codes Additionally the number of call appearance buttons administered in Communication Manager the default is three must match the number of call appearances programmed on the phone Finally Com...

Page 114: ...splays Note that some buttons may require 1 lamp or 2 lamp buttons Some buttons are not allowed on some systems and on some phones NOTE An NI BRI phone with Communication Manager has only the Conferen...

Page 115: ...AbrvDial char Abbreviated Dialing Special Character allows users to enter an associated special character m mark p pause s suppress w wait for dial tone or W wait forever when programming an abbrevia...

Page 116: ...er for the agent to finish ACD related activities such as completing paperwork Grp specify the ACD split group number 1 per split group alrt agchg Alert Agent Alert Agent indicates to the agent that t...

Page 117: ...or messages left for virtual extensions 1 per aut mst ext auto cback Auto CallBack Automatic Call Back when activated allows inside user who placed a call to a busy or unanswered telephone to be calle...

Page 118: ...w allows users to view on the phone s display the contents of any feature button Button View does more than the View or stored num feature button these only display what is contained in abbreviated di...

Page 119: ...kup used to redirect all CAS calls to a backup extension in the local branch if all RLTs are out of service or maintenance busy The associated status lamp indicates if CAS is in the backup mode 1 per...

Page 120: ...ck Coverage Callback Allows a covering party to store a leave word calling message for the principal called party 1 per station cov msg rt Covr Msg Retrieve Coverage Message Retrieval display button p...

Page 121: ...ignments to be displayed and changed Allows choice between XDID and XDIDVIP numbers 1 per station directory Directory Directory display button allows users with display telephones to access the system...

Page 122: ...button either before dialing or during the call Automatic Exclusion as soon as the user picks up the handset To turn off Automatic Exclusion during a call the user presses the EXCLUSION button To use...

Page 123: ...mmunication Manager The green LED is on for offhook state and off dark for onhook state hunt ns Grp ___ Hunt Group Hunt Group Night Service places a hunt group into night service Grp Hunt group number...

Page 124: ...rral call when a login security violation is detected 1 per system lwc cancel Cancel LWC Leave Word Calling Cancel cancels the last leave word calling message originated by the user 1 per station lwc...

Page 125: ...ws the user to take control of a malicious call trace request Once the user becomes the MCT controller the system stops notifying other MCT control extensions of the MCT request NOTE To add an extensi...

Page 126: ...trieval display button places the station s display into the message retrieval mode 1 per station mwn act Message Waiting Act Message Waiting Activation lights a message waiting lamp on an associated...

Page 127: ...MS printer interface failure occurred 1 per station pr sys alm Sys Ptr Alarm System Printer Alarm associated status lamp indicates that a system printer failure occurred 1 per station print msgs Print...

Page 128: ...er station signal Ext ___ Signal name or ext Signal allows the user to use one button to manually signal the associated extension The extension cannot be a VDN extension 1 per signal extension ssvn ha...

Page 129: ...nk 1 per station vip chkin VIP Check in VIP Check in display button allows user to assign the XDIDVIP number to the room extension 1 per station vip retry VIP Retry VIP Retry starts to flash when the...

Page 130: ...on allows a user to make and receive whisper pages A whisper page is an announcement sent to another extension who is active on a call where only the person on the extension hears the announcement any...

Page 131: ...numbers that some phone users might otherwise be restricted from manually dialing For example a user may be restricted from making long distance calls However you can program the number of a branch of...

Page 132: ...ge station 4567 and press ENTER The Station screen for extension 4567 appears 2 Press NEXT PAGE to get to the Abbreviated Dialing List fields 3 Type group in any of the List fields and press ENTER A b...

Page 133: ...urrent feature button assignments to determine if the user was pressing the assigned button If the user attempted to press the correct feature button the button may not be set up correctly 1 Type disp...

Page 134: ...in and out and both show when a line is in use A call to the primary phone is bridged to a specific appearance or button on the secondary phone The secondary phone retains all its functions and a spec...

Page 135: ...If Then your primary phone is analog move to the Line Appearance field and enter abrdg appr your primary phone is digital move to the Button Assignments field and enter brdg appr change station 75001...

Page 136: ...ault n 11 Press ENTER to save your changes To see if an extension has any bridged call appearances assigned type list bridge and the extension and press ENTER STATION SITE DATA Room _______ Headset n...

Page 137: ...ctions Each user may also be required to bridge onto existing hot line calls A bridged call appearance provides this capability A user frequently using telephones in different locations A user may not...

Page 138: ...When the timer state is included the Extension to Cellular user can activate a one hour timer to temporarily disable Extension to Cellular through this administered feature button 6 Press ENTER The c...

Page 139: ...pound button or the Done softkey Instructions You need to assign a security code to the user s Station screen for each user you want to enable access to TSA You also need to assign the user an Admin f...

Page 140: ...ephone enters the Admin mode stays active while the telephone is in the Admin mode ACD agents who wish access to the Admin mode of TSA must be logged off before pressing the Admin button If they are n...

Page 141: ...w your attendants to monitor system problems toll fraud abuse traffic patterns The number of consoles you can have in your organization varies depending on your Avaya solution 302 attendant consoles A...

Page 142: ...ttendant console Figure notes 1 Call processing area 2 Handset 3 Handset cradle 4 Warning lamps and call waiting lamps 5 Call appearance buttons 6 Feature area 7 Trunk group select buttons 8 Volume co...

Page 143: ...lay buttons 7 Display 8 Select buttons 9 Volume control buttons 10 Outside line buttons 11 Feature buttons 12 Call appearance buttons a b c d e f Position Available Forced Release Night Pos Busy Calls...

Page 144: ...trable Hundreds group Select buttons Numbers 1 20 are for identification only 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 20 21 22 23...

Page 145: ...th the characters sent from Avaya Communication Manager Avaya PC consoles The Avaya PC Console is a Microsoft Windows based call handling application for Avaya Communication Manager attendants It prov...

Page 146: ...of service COS that you assign on this Console screen override the COR and COS you assigned on the Console Parameters screen To avoid unexpected behavior you should assign the same COR and same COS o...

Page 147: ...ttons you can assign to a console see Attendant Console Feature Buttons Tip Feature buttons are not numbered top to bottom on the attendant console as you might expect Button numbers map to physical p...

Page 148: ...ate Time date time 1 Inspect Mode inspect 1 Normal Mode normal 1 Stored Number stored num 1 Attendant Hundreds Group Select Group Select _ hundrd sel Grp __ 20 per console 5 Attendant Room Status Occu...

Page 149: ...View did view 1 Do Not Disturb Hospitality Do Not Disturb dn dst 1 Do Not Disturb Hospitality display buttons Do Not Disturb Ext ext dn dst 1 Do Not Disturb Grp grp dn dst 1 Don t Split Don t Split d...

Page 150: ...Leave Word Calling Cancel LWC lwc cancel 1 LWC lwc store 1 Leave Word Calling display buttons Delete Msg delete msg 1 Next next 1 Call Display call disp 1 Leave Word Calling Remote Message Waiting sta...

Page 151: ...Notification Halt ssvn halt ssvn halt 1 per system Serial Call Serial Call serial cal 1 Split Swap Split swap split swap 1 11 System Reset Alert System Reset Alert status lamp rs alert 1 Station Secu...

Page 152: ...nter a stroke code 0 through 9 4 TAC local tgs TAC of local TG remote tgs L TAC TAC of TG to remote PBX remote tgs R TAC TAC of TG on remote PBX The combination of local tgs remote tgs per console mus...

Page 153: ...field enter 20 The system issues a reminder tone if a call waits in the attendant queue for more than 20 seconds 4 Press ENTER to save changes Note that some of the settings on the individual Attendan...

Page 154: ...ension For example if extension 1234 belongs to hunt group 2 type change hunt group 2 and delete the extension from the list 6 Type remove attendant 3 and press ENTER The system displays the Attendant...

Page 155: ...service COS set to No For more information see Class of Service on page 696 If you have not yet defined a Trunk Answer Any Station TAAS feature access code you need to define one and provide the feat...

Page 156: ...re are no calls in the attendant queue When the button shows a steady light busy state there are calls in the attendant queue When button shows a flashing light warning state the number of calls in th...

Page 157: ...he display goes blank after 30 seconds However the information for each new call overrides the existing message Call information appears on the display only if the call terminates at the phone For exa...

Page 158: ...ore you start Be sure the Analog Trunk Incoming Call ID field is set to y on the System Parameters Customer Options screen See the Hardware Guide for Avaya Communication Manager for information on the...

Page 159: ...llcore in the Receive Analog Incoming Call ID field 4 Press NEXT PAGE to display the Administrable Timers section 5 Type 120 in the Incoming Seizure msec field 6 Press ENTER to save your changes chang...

Page 160: ...Call your Avaya representative for details Instructions We will change the display message language to German for the user at attendant console 1 a 40 character display model Also change the transfer...

Page 161: ...Ukrainian characters See the System Parameters Country Options Screen Reference for more information and field descriptions Fixing problems change display language transfer conference Page 1 of 3 Lan...

Page 162: ...ton Assignments section 3 In Button Assignment field 6 type directory 4 In Button Assignment field 7 type next 5 In Button Assignment field 8 type call display 6 Press ENTER to save your changes Nothi...

Page 163: ...coverage allows an incoming call to redirect from its original destination to an extension hunt group attendant group uniform call distribution UCD group direct department calling DDC group automatic...

Page 164: ...ntil the call connects This sequence of alternate extensions is called a coverage path The system redirects calls based on certain criteria For example you can have a call redirect to coverage without...

Page 165: ...a certain number of rings or if the DND do not disturb SAC send all calls or Go to Cover button has been pressed or corresponding feature access codes dialed 4 Fill in the Point fields with the exten...

Page 166: ...TER to save your changes Related information See Station security codes on page 1681 for a description of the Station Security Codes feature on page 308 Setting up Advanced Call Coverage Advanced inco...

Page 167: ...more information on the circuit pack Call Classifier Detector circuit pack Instructions To provide coverage of calls redirected to an off site location 1 Type change system parameters coverage forwar...

Page 168: ...er as a coverage point you need to define the number in the Remote Call Coverage Table and then use the remote code in the coverage path Instructions For example to add an external number 303 538 1000...

Page 169: ...to save your changes Related topics See Call coverage on page 1417 for more information on coverage Defining time of day coverage The Time of Day Coverage Table on your system lets you redirect calls...

Page 170: ...u do not list a coverage path for a period of time the system does not provide coverage for that time 3 Press ENTER to save your changes Now assign the time of day coverage to a user For example we us...

Page 171: ...RETURN The Coverage Answer Group screen appears 2 In the Group Name field enter a name to identify the coverage group 3 In the Ext field type the extension of each group member 4 Press ENTER to save y...

Page 172: ...or you can administer system wide call forwarding parameters to control when calls are forwarded Use the System Parameters Call Coverage Call Forwarding screen to set the number of times an extension...

Page 173: ...e 72 feature access code deactivates the call forwarding option 5 Press ENTER to save your changes FEATURE ACCESS CODE FAC Abbreviated Dialing List1 Access Code ____ Abbreviated Dialing List2 Access C...

Page 174: ...ge their call forwarding destination from their work local station 1 They dial either their Call Forwarding Activation Busy DA or Call Forwarding Activation All feature access code If your users have...

Page 175: ...ll Forward Activate All number 3 When they get dial tone they dial their extension number and press the key In this example enter 1014 then 4 Even though there is no dial tone they dial their security...

Page 176: ...alls your end users merely press a button on the console or a feature button on their phones to toggle between normal coverage and night service There are five types of night service Night Console Nig...

Page 177: ...appear on the Listed Directory Numbers screen Instead it is on the Tenant screen 4 Type change listed directory numbers and press RETURN The Listed Directory Numbers screen appears Page 1 of X HUNT G...

Page 178: ...ce mail build your auto attendant with the extension of the Listed Directory Number not the hunt group The originally dialed number was the LDN That is what Communication Manager passes to the voice m...

Page 179: ...t console or designated console Only the principal console can activate night service In the absence of any console a phone can activate night service Instructions We will put the attendant console at...

Page 180: ...e it is recorded at announcement extension 1234 See Recording Announcements on page 376 for information on setting up the announcement Tip All trunk groups that are routed through the attendant direct...

Page 181: ...a bell or a buzzer This lets other people in the office know when they should answer the phone NOTE If no one answers the call the call will not redirect to night service We will define a feature acce...

Page 182: ...DE FAC Station Security Code Change Access Code ____ Terminal Dial up Test Access Code ____ Terminal Translation Initialization Merge Code ____ Separation Code ____ Transfer to AUDIX Access Code ____...

Page 183: ...e next point in the station s coverage path If the call was sent to the Attendant by Call Forwarding it continues to ring the TAAS bell When night service is enabled and there is a night service desti...

Page 184: ...ny 0 seeking calls go to extension 3000 the guard s desk CONSOLE PARAMETERS Attendant Group Name Operator COS 0 COR 0 Calls in Queue Warning 5 Attendant Lockout y Ext Alert Port TAAS 01A0702 CAS none...

Page 185: ...al trunk groups to night service The system redirects calls from the trunk group to the group s night service destination Trunk group night service overrides night station service For example we will...

Page 186: ...l after hours you would like them to hear an announcement that asks them to try their call again in the morning Instructions To set up night service for your helpline you need to record the announceme...

Page 187: ...ee Adding Feature Buttons on page 113 for more information Related topics Managing Hunt Groups on page 193 How do night service types interact Here is an example of how several types of night service...

Page 188: ...ring a feature access code FAC followed by the 1 or 2 digit pickup index number Creating pickup groups A pickup group is a list of phones where each member of the group can answer another member s cal...

Page 189: ...to determine if directed call pickup is enabled on your system and make sure that the user s phone has a COR that allows directed call pickup To determine if Directed Call Pickup is enabled on your sy...

Page 190: ...Press ENTER to save your changes 4 Type change feature access codes and press ENTER The Feature Access Code screen appears 5 In the Extended Group Call Pickup Access Code field type the desired FAC S...

Page 191: ...p Numbers 11 Press ENTER to save your changes Setting up flexible extended group pickup To create a flexible extended pickup group 1 Type change system parameters features and press ENTER The Feature...

Page 192: ...ups that can have their calls picked up by the pickup groups with identical extended pickup group numbers The pickup groups numbers are listed using the lowest available Pickup Numbers A unique Extend...

Page 193: ...you want more than one person to be able to answer calls to the same number For example set up a hunt group for a benefits department within your company a travel reservations service Setting up hunt...

Page 194: ...ime since login NOTE The COS for all hunt groups defaults to 1 Therefore any changes to COS 1 on the Class of Service screen changes the COS for all your hunt groups A COS field does not appear on the...

Page 195: ...roup Changing a hunt group To make changes to a hunt group 1 Type change hunt group n and press ENTER where n is the number of the hunt group 2 Change the necessary fields 3 Press ENTER to save your c...

Page 196: ...be in the queue before the system flashes the queue status buttons In our example type 5 5 In the Time Warning Threshold field type the maximum number of seconds you want a call to wait in the queue b...

Page 197: ...ning on the phone and then typing on the TTY a process made considerably easier with an acoustically coupled configuration Although TTY emulation software packages are available for PCs most of these...

Page 198: ...lay announcement interval to 0 callers automatically hear the announcement before anything else This is called a forced first announcement 5 Press ENTER to save your changes You can use the same annou...

Page 199: ...ll will look as if it is a direct station call rather than the expected VDN display of station name to vdn name What are vectors A vector is a series of commands that you design to tell the system how...

Page 200: ...a new party joins the Meet Me conference such as a step to collect digits a 1 second delay or play an announcement Since Meet Me vectors are always configured with announcements and digit collections...

Page 201: ...hat come into the main business number redirect to a queue We will use a vector controlled hunt group for the main number queue This hunt group was set up as main split 47 When calls first arrive all...

Page 202: ...e though it merely skips the queue to step and plays the announcement The system cannot queue a call more than once in the exact same priority level To play and repeat an announcement write this vecto...

Page 203: ...ctor that allows callers to leave messages This type of vector uses a hunt group called a messaging split For our example we send after hours calls to the voice mailbox at extension 2000 and use messa...

Page 204: ...Insert the following bold steps steps 1 10 and 11 See Inserting a step on page 205 for more information CALL VECTOR Number 1 Name main number calls ______ Multimedia n Lock n Basic y EAS n G3V4 Enhan...

Page 205: ...Please note the following example of this auto attendant vector is a new vector and is not built on the vector we used in the previous example To let callers connect to an extension write this kind o...

Page 206: ...rted when the numbering needs more attention Handling TTY calls with vectors Unlike fax machines and computer modems a Tele typwriter device TTY has no handshake tone and no carrier tone A TTY is sile...

Page 207: ...in split 47 NOTE The voice caller is sent to vector step 3 also but a voice caller does not go to vector step 8 because the caller did not enter 1 at vector step 2 Instead voice callers continue on t...

Page 208: ...an incoming call to a specific vector This number is a soft extension number not assigned to an equipment location VDNs must follow your dial plan We will create VDN 5011 for our sales department A c...

Page 209: ...he VDN Override on the Vector Directory Number screen controls the operation of the display 3 Enter the vector number In our example type 11 4 In the Measured field indicate how you want to measure ca...

Page 210: ...give you the ability to measure more aspects of your center s operation and in more detail than is possible with standard Avaya Communication Manager reports Call vectoring greatly enhances the flexi...

Page 211: ...ield type 6725 This is the extension for the advertising group 3 In the Group Name field type advertising This is the name of the group 4 In the Coverage Path field type 5 This is the number of the ca...

Page 212: ...r the advertising group 14 Press ENTER to save your changes Page 2 of X STATION FEATURE OPTIONS LWC Reception msa spe Auto Select Any Idle Appearance n LWC Activation y Coverage Msg Retrieval y CDR Pr...

Page 213: ...verted to AAR calls and vice versa The FAC for AAR is usually the digit 8 The FAC for ARS is usually the digit 9 in the US and 0 outside of the US Your Avaya technician or business partner sets up AAR...

Page 214: ...appears 4 Type 9 in the ARS access code field and press ENTER to save your changes Location ARS FAC The Location ARS FAC allows users in different locations to use the same culturally significant FAC...

Page 215: ...ow to handle the dialed digits Communication Manager also uses Class of Restriction COR and Facility Restriction Level FRL to determine the calling privileges Let us look at a very simple AAR and ARS...

Page 216: ...a dialed number for more efficient routing Digits may be inserted or deleted from the dialed number For instance you can tell Communication Manager to delete a 1 and an area code on calls to one of y...

Page 217: ...1 91 222 0111 222 0111 Call routes to local server RNX 222 then to attendant 222 0111 International call to announcement This method may also be used to block unauthorized IDDD calls 9 011 91 672530 0...

Page 218: ...ree digits plus the number as it is normally dialed including 0 00 or 1 10 digits These numbers are set up on your default translations Remember the user dials 9 to access ARS then the rest of the num...

Page 219: ...s 201 through 209 We use the digit analysis table 120 because it defines long distance calls that begin with 1 and all area codes from 200 through 209 To deny long distance calls to the 200 area code...

Page 220: ...r deny denied in the Route Pattern field 6 Enter fnhp in the Call Type field 7 Press ENTER to save your changes Defining local information calls You can set up Communication Manager to allow calls to...

Page 221: ...to y If this field is set to n contact your Avaya representative for more information Be sure your daylight savings rules are administered Daylight Savings Rule numbers are located on the Daylight Sa...

Page 222: ...field in the Number 2 row In our example subtract one hour from the system clock in Chicago to provide the correct time for the location in New York 9 Type 1 in the Daylight Savings Rule field in the...

Page 223: ...routing tables with Location field set to all Before you start Be sure the Multiple Locations field on the System Parameters Customer Options screen is set to y If this field is set to n contact your...

Page 224: ...Type 3 in the Total Max field Type 1 in the Route Pattern field Type svcl in the Call Type field 3 Press ENTER to save your changes 4 Type change ars analysis 4 location 2 and press ENTER The ARS Dig...

Page 225: ...dify call routing For example you ll need to update this table to add new area codes or to restrict users from calling specific areas or countries Adding a new area code or prefix A common task for sy...

Page 226: ...values from step 2 in the Total Mn and Total Mx fields In our example enter 11 in each field 7 Enter the route pattern from step 2 in the Route Pattern field In our example enter 30 8 Enter fnpa in t...

Page 227: ...900 and 976 pay per call numbers SECURITY ALERT To prevent toll fraud deny calls to countries where you do not do business The following countries are currently concerns for fraudulent calling Instruc...

Page 228: ...horization Codes field on the System Parameters Customer Options screen is set to y SECURITY ALERT You should make authorization codes as long as possible to increase the level of security You can set...

Page 229: ...igit Analysis Table Before you start Verify that the Tenant Partitioning field on the System Parameters Customer Options screen is y Verify that the Time of Day Routing field on the System Parameters...

Page 230: ...ute pattern 30 5 In the PGN2 column that corresponds to Route Index 1 type 30 and press ENTER This tells the system to use route pattern 30 for partition group 2 and allow partition group 2 members to...

Page 231: ...calls based on the least expensive route according to the time of day and day of the week the call is made You can also deny outgoing long distance calls after business hours to help prevent toll fra...

Page 232: ...r example two partition group numbers control time of day routing PGN 1 begins one minute after midnight 00 01 every day of the week and is used for after business hours and all day Saturday and Sunda...

Page 233: ...nto work on Monday morning at 8 30 and makes an ARS call dials the ARS access code followed by the number of the person he is calling the system checks the Time of Day Plan Number assigned to Jim s CO...

Page 234: ...ence between this location and system time 5 In the Daylight Savings field enter 1 if this country has daylight savings 6 Press ENTER to save your changes change locations Page 1 of x LOCATIONS ARS Pr...

Page 235: ...___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ __ ___ ____ ________ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ __ ___ ____ ________ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ __ ___ ____ ________ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ __ ___ __...

Page 236: ...twork Region 1 New York using Codec Set 1 18 Press ENTER to save your changes Related Topics See Multiple locations on page 1616 of the Features Technical Reference chapter for more information on the...

Page 237: ...SI features Basic Call Place Drop Avaya Communication Manager tracks the status of all calls placed to or from a MASI terminal Call Detail Recording Avaya Communication Manager tracks calls to and fro...

Page 238: ...dministration terminal SAT and the MMCX administration terminal to administer MASI This document describes what you need to do at the DEFINITY Server SAT It also occasionally mentions administration t...

Page 239: ...ister MASI you should make a plan for how to do it Among the configurations on the following pages there is probably one that matches the configuration of your system fairly closely You might want to...

Page 240: ...requires a TN464C or later DS1 circuit pack You administer this link as an ISDN PRI trunk group a MASI path and an NCA TSC I1 and I2 These are MMCX interfaces to destinations other than Avaya Communic...

Page 241: ...or Avaya Communication Manager 241 November 2003 Figure 15 MASI domain of Avaya Communication Manager running on one DEFINITY Server and two or more MMCXs DEFINITY PSTN PSTN WAN AUDIX S1 Trunk 1 Trunk...

Page 242: ...ministrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager November 2003 Figure 16 Two separate MASI domains DEFINITY PSTN PSTN WAN AUDIX S1 Trunk 1 Trunk 4 Trunk 3 Trunk 2 SG2 SG1 MMCX 1 MMCX 2 DEFINITY 1 D...

Page 243: ...SI This section discusses the administration required to make MASI work You perform most of this administration from the DEFINITY Server administration terminal However there are a few things you must...

Page 244: ...ns command Avaya init or inads logins only set MASI alarming options For more information see the Maintenance for Avaya Communication Manager and DEFNITY S8000 series Media Server document for your sp...

Page 245: ...gure 19 Administered NCA TSC Assignment page of the Signaling Group screen Page 1 of 5 SIGNALING GROUP Group Number _ Associated Signaling y Max number of NCA TSC __ Primary D Channel ______ Max numbe...

Page 246: ...sion This must correspond to the value of the tscnum argument to the chgmasi command NOTE These digits are sent as entered to the destination MMCX no routing or other digit manipulation is performed A...

Page 247: ...termine if the link is active Step 6 Administer ISDN PRI trunk group Use the command add trunk group xxx to access the Trunk Groups screen For a more detailed description of the ISDN PRI trunk group s...

Page 248: ...ou use the MASI trunk group screen to define MMCX interfaces that interconnect MASI nodes or that connect MMCX nodes to another private switch or central office Examples of MMCX interfaces include PRI...

Page 249: ...ING CALL COR Enter a Class of Restriction COR number 0 95 that reflects the desired restriction default is 1 TN This field displays the Tenant Partition number All MASI trunks are associated with Tena...

Page 250: ...ut Step 9 Administer MASI terminals Use the add masi terminal xxxxx or next command to administer each MASI terminal as a MASI terminal You use available extensions on the ECS so they need to conform...

Page 251: ...type of traffic the terminal supports For MASI this is always 0 for voice or voice grade data MASI Node Number The number of the node on which this terminal resides TN The tenant partition in which th...

Page 252: ...s on DEFINITY Server R configurations This field contains the name of the AUDIX messaging adjunct for LWC messages If the LWC Reception field is set to audix this field must contain a name The name mu...

Page 253: ..._____ _________ _____ _____ 77778 ___________________________ _________ _____ _____ 77779 ___________________________ _________ _____ _____ 77781 ___________________________ _________ _____ _____ 7778...

Page 254: ...vaya Communication Manager and you need to purchase this option to use it with MMCX To verify that this feature is enabled use the command display system parameters customer options If it is not enabl...

Page 255: ...verage from a MASI terminal to AUDIX 1 Use the MMCX user interface to enter the AUDIX hunt group extension as the coverage point You cannot use Avaya Communication Manager coverage administration for...

Page 256: ...from one MMCX to another MMCX do not use AAR ARS Authorization codes are not supported Call Detail Recording Using the MASI link Avaya Communication Manager is able to track call detail information fo...

Page 257: ...a MASI terminal Avaya Communication Manager tracks calls to MASI terminals that follow the autonomous coverage path from the MASI terminal MMCX calls redirected to Communication Manager stations cont...

Page 258: ...e the following CAUTION CAUTION DO NOT ADMINISTER the following features The following features are not supported for use over the MASI link and Avaya cannot be responsible for the results if you atte...

Page 259: ...busy lamp indicates status of the MASI terminal Emergency Access to the Attendant MASI terminals have emergency access using the attendant access code if it is administered in the MMCX dial plan Howe...

Page 260: ...dicator lamp must be on a Communication Manager station You cannot use FBI to track MMCX interfaces Facility Test Calls Avaya Communication Manager users cannot make test calls to MMCX interfaces Go t...

Page 261: ...onnect the cable and follow normal test procedures If the far end path termination number is incorrect you should observe MASI PTH error 513 To resolve correct administration using the MASI Path Param...

Page 262: ...media call for MMCH is one that conforms to the H 320 and T 120 suite of protocol standards These standards allow video conferencing packages from different vendors to communicate with one another The...

Page 263: ...hysically connected to Avaya Communication Manager with a BRI line Figure 33 Enhanced MMCH service link Enhanced mode service link The service link is the combined hardware and software multimedia con...

Page 264: ...ntrol depends on what type of call is being originated Video is received and controlled at the PC Voice is received and controlled at the telephone set The voice station of a Basic multimedia complex...

Page 265: ...ively associated to form a Basic or ENHANCED multimedia complex MMCH works with any H 320 system that is fully H 320 compliant and operates at the 2B or 128K rate NOTE If you intend to share applicati...

Page 266: ...to connect to the ESM equipment 1 Install the TN2207 primary rate interface PRI circuit pack and the TN787 multimedia interface MMI circuit pack in the port carrier of the server for Avaya Communicati...

Page 267: ...nstallation checklist 1 Purchase MMCH right to use 2 Avaya enable MMCH on System Parameters Customer Options screen 3 Administer default multimedia outgoing trunk parameter selection on the Feature Re...

Page 268: ...M Complex Data Ext p 1 H 320 Conversion p 2 Multimedia Early Answer p 2 Multimedia Mode p 2 Service Link Mode p 2 Feature Buttons p 3 optional Hunt Group MM Early Answer optional Call Vector Multimedi...

Page 269: ...atures screen shown below NOTE Originating a multimedia call with the mm call button will originate a call according to the Default Multimedia Parameters selected on the System Parameters Features scr...

Page 270: ...ese fields must be set to n Station screen After you have administered the BRI data module use the Station screen to associate it with a voice station to screen a multimedia complex This is a one to o...

Page 271: ...destinations call pickup members and so forth do not need to have the H 320 field enabled The H 320 field is only needed at the first station that may receive the H 320 call Service Link Mode The serv...

Page 272: ...by going off hook and will have immediate audio path No hourglass tone will be heard by the answering party see Hourglass Tone on page 280 Example An administrative assistant who does not have a mult...

Page 273: ...cnf button from any voice station that is participating in a multimedia call will light the status lamp and alert the Avaya DEFINITY Server that you want to enable T 120 data collaboration with the ot...

Page 274: ...DS1 xxxxx where xxxxx is the location of the TN2207 PRI circuit pack recorded in step 2 and the DS1 circuit pack administration screen appears 4 Set the Name field to ESM DS1 5 Set the Bit Rate field...

Page 275: ...minal to view your changes Troubleshooting To determine ESM link status enter the following commands from the system administration terminal 1 Status esm 2 Status signaling group 3 List MMI NOTE When...

Page 276: ...imedia equipped PC These multimedia calls use the associated station s COR COS The voice station of a Basic multimedia complex may also use the mm call button or FAC and the mm multinbr button or FAC...

Page 277: ...ty of the multimedia calls will either be 56K or 64K and the bandwidth will be 2B channels For calls with a bandwidth of 2B use of the mm call button to originate will cause the same destination addre...

Page 278: ...ts using abbreviated dial entries last number dialed etc Originating a multimedia call with the MM multinbr FAC will originate a call according to the Default Multimedia Parameters selected on the Fea...

Page 279: ...Dial AAR ARS Dial 2nd dest digits 5 Single address with AAR ARS and authorization code Dial mm call button or FAC Hear dialtone Dial AAR ARS FAC Dial destination digits Hear stutter dialtone Dial auth...

Page 280: ...tion of special ringback followed by incoming call tone is referred to as hourglass tone Hourglass tone is an indication to the answering party that they should wait for the H 320 call to establish au...

Page 281: ...l all parties have joined Once all endpoints are on the conference the voice terminal user may put the call on hold or drop if the user wishes Video conferees can see only their local video and one ot...

Page 282: ...ically the last point in a coverage path and are usually implemented as a hunt group In order to guarantee that the originator of an H 320 multimedia call hears the voice mail greeting the hunt group...

Page 283: ...g has been enabled for a conference that it remain active for the duration of the conference call When all endpoints have dropped from the call the T 120 resources will be released Joining a multimedi...

Page 284: ...forward FAC You can also assign a call forward button at the voice station to forward calls for the data endpoint If a Basic multimedia complex has console permissions that user can forward calls for...

Page 285: ...o point data hunting put the data extension in the hunt group If you place the voice extension in a hunt group only voice calls hunt to that extension Multimedia calls to a hunt group with a Basic mod...

Page 286: ...ls will be treated independently and routed to separate agents This is not a recommended configuration Hunting with Multimedia vectors Calls are often routed to hunt groups or skills via a vector The...

Page 287: ...rties of any type to a conference is subject to standard tenant partitioning restrictions Terminating Extension Groups Basic mode data calls to a TEG are converted to voice and can terminate only at a...

Page 288: ...called by Communication Manager to establish the service link If the H 320 DVC is not configured for auto answer the user must answer the H 320 calls via the DVC GUI If the H 320 DVC is configured for...

Page 289: ...ination has a different address for each B channel NOTE The mm call feature button is generally used by stations that are part of an Enhanced multimedia complex but may be used by any station to origi...

Page 290: ...sed instead It allows origination of a multimedia call from a voice station It is used when the destination being dialed requires a different address for each of the 2 B channels An example of this is...

Page 291: ...ally used by stations that are part of an Enhanced multimedia complex but may be used by any station to originate a dual address multimedia call 6 Dialing sequences that include TACs AAR ARS Authoriza...

Page 292: ...ce and going off hook on the voice station Answering multimedia calls Incoming multimedia calls will alert at the voice station of the Enhanced multimedia complex in the same manner as voice calls wit...

Page 293: ...edia call has its own call appearance which may be selected without regard for the nature of the call using the specific call appearance This allows a multifunction station to control multiple voice o...

Page 294: ...ideo conference 1 Set up a multimedia conference 2 Once a multimedia call is active any member can initiate data collaboration by pressing the mm datacnf button Or to use the feature access code to in...

Page 295: ...tion conference If an Enhanced multimedia complex is active on a multimedia call and the call has activated T 120 data collaboration the user should be receiving voice video and data If the station pl...

Page 296: ...asic mode operation allows this functionality at the expense of losing multimedia call handling capabilities i e hold xfer conf To switch from Enhanced mode to Basic mode the station may either select...

Page 297: ...are typically the last point in a coverage path and are usually implemented as a hunt group In order to guarantee that the originator of an H 320 multimedia call hears the voice mail greeting the hunt...

Page 298: ...mmunication Manager will never associate pairs of calls and all calls will be treated independently and routed to separate agents This is not a recommended configuration Multimedia vectors Very often...

Page 299: ...call pickup Consult After a multimedia call has been answered consult may be used when transferring or conferencing the call COR COS The Class of Restriction and Class of Service for a multimedia cal...

Page 300: ...tion Troubleshooting If one channel of a 2 B channel call goes down your choices are to continue with reduced transmission quality or to hang up the call and start over It is not possible to re establ...

Page 301: ...or the station Enter this number with the status conference endpoint command to learn more about this endpoint s involvement in the conference List commands The list multimedia endpoints command shows...

Page 302: ...dle In addition each conference takes one port on a voice conditioner circuit pack Also note that there is a limit to the total number of conversion calls the system can handle simultaneously If you e...

Page 303: ...lls off your network onto the public network and bring back unanswered calls for further coverage NOTE If a call covers or forwards off net and an answering machine answers the call or it is directed...

Page 304: ...n Initialization TTI If neither Avaya Communication Manager extender nor the System Parameters Customer Options fields are configured contact your Avaya representative Verify the telecommuting access...

Page 305: ...associate a phone generate referral calls and are recorded by Security Violation Notification if that feature is enabled If you interrupt the PSA dialing sequence by pressing the release button or by...

Page 306: ...s 6 Complete the following fields and press ENTER a Type 4 in the Personal Station Access PSA Associate Code field This is the feature access code you will use to activate Personal Station Access at a...

Page 307: ...ress ENTER This sets the access codes for this features The Command prompt appears 3 Type change system parameters security and press ENTER The Security Related System Parameters screen appears 4 Type...

Page 308: ...click the Security icon The Password Manager screen appears 2 Double click User Password for User 01 3 Select Enable Password to enable the password 4 Click random This means that the password is a s...

Page 309: ...of service to set up call forwarding This allows your users to forward their calls to another extension To set up call forwarding 1 Type change feature access codes and press ENTER The Feature Access...

Page 310: ...n 1 so it can be accessed by all tenants The tenant number of the extension being administered must be accessible by the tenant number from which the Extended User Administration of Redirected Calls F...

Page 311: ...field type y and press ENTER to save your work The Command prompt appears 5 Type change station 1234 and press ENTER This is the station extension you configured for telecommuting The Station screen a...

Page 312: ...tting up Personal Station Access on page 305 Instructions Installing home equipment To install your home equipment 1 Plug the phone cord into the slot labeled line on the back of the module and into t...

Page 313: ...feature access code 2 Type 4321 and press This is your extension number 3 Type 1996 and press This is your password Disassociating your home station To disassociate your home station 1 Press HOLD fou...

Page 314: ...e access information Each authorized user should be instructed concerning the proper use and handling of access codes In rare instances unauthorized individuals make connections to the telecommunicati...

Page 315: ...e call restriction features 8 Type 1 in the TN field This is the Tenant Partition TN number 9 Type 1 in the COS field This is the class of service COS number associated with the barrier code that defi...

Page 316: ...k This allows you to make business calls from home or use Recorded Telephone Dictation Access to dictate a letter If authorized you can also access system features from any on site extension With Remo...

Page 317: ...Configure call forwarding for your system For information about configuring call forwarding see Setting up Call Forwarding on page 309 Configure security codes for a station For information about con...

Page 318: ...ding In this example we change call forwarding to extension 1235 To change call forwarding 1 Dial 1234 This is the extension you configured for telecommuting 2 Dial 8 and press This is the feature acc...

Page 319: ...t tone in step 3 The system does not log an invalid attempt You must restart the process at step 1 Type before the second in step 3 You must begin the change sequence at the point of entering your ext...

Page 320: ...Setting Up Telecommuting Training Users 320 Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager November 2003...

Page 321: ...ble a valid login ID following a security violation involving that login ID and disable remote access following a security violation involving a barrier code or authorization code Use the list history...

Page 322: ...set for maximum length Change the codes frequently It is your responsibility to keep your own records regarding who is allowed to use which authorization code 4 Place protection on systems that prompt...

Page 323: ...k up system files regularly to ensure a timely recovery Schedule regular off site backups 14 Callers misrepresenting themselves as the phone company AT T RBOCS or even known employees within your comp...

Page 324: ...te Access screen in the Permanently Disable field type y See QSIG to DCS TSC Gateway on page 1114 for more information on remote access NOTE Avaya recommends that you permanently disable Remote Access...

Page 325: ...e routing the call off net or via AAR assign a unique COR where the FRLis 0 the Calling Party Restriction field is outward the Calling Permissions field is n on all unique Trunk Group COR c If the vec...

Page 326: ...trunking facilities Avaya recommends assigning routes with an FRL of 1 or higher NOTE An exception might be assigning a route pattern with an FRL of 0 to be used for 911 calls so even restricted user...

Page 327: ...on page 682 for more information NOTE Avaya recommends you administer as many layers of security as possible You can implement Step 9 and Step 16 as a double layer of security In the event that the v...

Page 328: ...rs screen SVN Login Violation Notification field is y 4 In the Login s Password field type b3stm0m The password does not appear on the screen as you type 5 In the Reenter Login s Password field retype...

Page 329: ...th the date the password was created or changed and continuing for a specified number of days 1 to 99 COMMAND PERMISSION CATEGORIES Login Name angi3 COMMON COMMANDS Display Admin and Maint Data n Syst...

Page 330: ...9 a z A Z The password must be from 7 to 11 alphanumeric characters in length and contain at least 1 non alphabetic character Instructions We will change the login angi3 with the password b3stm0m We a...

Page 331: ...This section shows you how to display a user s login and review their permissions Instructions To display a login such as angi3 1 Type display login angi3 and press ENTER The LOGIN ADMINISTRATION scre...

Page 332: ...verify the Access Security Gateway field is y If not contact your Avaya representative Instructions To set up access security gateway 1 Type change login xxxx and press ENTER where xxxx is the alphan...

Page 333: ...m Parameters screen appears 8 In the Access Security Gateway Parameters section you determine which of the following necessary port type fields to set to y NOTE Avaya recommends that you protect the S...

Page 334: ...ruser Restarting Access Security Gateway To restart temporarily disabled access security gateway access for login 1 Type change login xxxx and press ENTER where xxxx is the alphanumeric login ID The L...

Page 335: ...s ENTER The Access Security Gateway screen appears This screen contains the following fields Date Contains the date of the session establishment or rejection For example the date displays in the mm dd...

Page 336: ...e sure the defaults are appropriate for the user The default values for these fields vary based on the login type Instructions We will change the login permissions of angi3 To change login permissions...

Page 337: ...pears 2 In the Password of Login Making Change field type your password to change any field on this screen We ll type angi3 COMMAND PERMISSION CATEGORIES RESTRICTED OBJECT LIST vdn ___________________...

Page 338: ...you type 5 Press ENTER to save your changes Using Busy Verify This section shows you how to use Busy Verify also known as Busy Verification to help find fraud problems When you suspect toll fraud you...

Page 339: ...m users calling privileges They extend calling privilege control and provide an extra level of security for remote access callers NOTE To maintain system security Avaya recommends you use authorizatio...

Page 340: ...oes not dial an authorization code within 10 seconds or dials an invalid authorization code 6 In the Display Authorization Code field type n This prevents the authorization code from displaying on pho...

Page 341: ...more information on using Call Detail Recording CDR on station phones See Class of Restriction on page 682 and Station on page 1157 for more information on using Class of Restriction COR on station p...

Page 342: ...book for more information Before you start If you are using ASG on the System Parameters Customer Options screen verify the Access Security Gateway field is y If not contact your Avaya representative...

Page 343: ...go to Step 11 8 Optional Type change remote access and press ENTER The QSIG to DCS TSC Gateway screen appears 9 Optional In the Disable Following A Security Violation field type y This disables Remote...

Page 344: ...er Code Security Violation Notification call is activated as a call referral This applies only if you are using Remote Access barrier codes ssvn halt The Station Code Security Violation Notification c...

Page 345: ...y code of up to 8 digits In the COR field leave the default at 1 3 In the Button Assignments section type sta lock 4 Press ENTER to save your changes 5 Type change cor 1 and press ENTER 6 In the Calli...

Page 346: ...s ENTER The Feature Access Codes screen appears 8 Move the cursor to the Station Lock Activation field 9 In the Activation field type 08 10 In the Deactivation field type 08 11 Press ENTER to save you...

Page 347: ...y violation or disabled manually 1 Log in to Avaya Communication Manager using a login ID with the correct permissions 2 Type enable remote access and press ENTER Disabling remote access There may be...

Page 348: ...Enhancing System Security Dealing with Security Violations 348 Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager November 2003...

Page 349: ...outgoing or 2 way trunks administer Automatic Route Selection so Avaya Communication Manager knows which outgoing calls to route over this trunk group 6 Test your new trunk group Using the trunk acce...

Page 350: ...formation you need to get What type of trunk group is it You need to know what kind of trunks these are central office CO foreign exchange FX etc and whether they use any special services such as T1 d...

Page 351: ...r circuit pack installation instructions See Modifying Call Routing on page 225 for detailed information on Automatic Route Selection Adding a CO FX or WATS Trunk Group Basic administration for Centra...

Page 352: ...ls over this trunk group Assign a class of restriction that s appropriate for the COR calling permissions administered on your system 5 In the TAC field type 105 This field defines a unique code that...

Page 353: ...cy DTMF and rotary signals so Avaya recommends that you always put tone in this field 12 In the Trunk Termination field type rc Use rc in this field when the distance to the central office or the medi...

Page 354: ...mple we re adding trunk group 5 2 In the Group Type field type did This field specifies the kind of trunk group you re creating 3 In the Group Name field type Incoming calls You can type any name up t...

Page 355: ...add trunks to this trunk group See Adding Trunks to a Trunk Group on page 366 for more information Related topics See Inserting and Absorbing Digits on page 369 for instructions on matching modifying...

Page 356: ...ports 5 In the Trunk Type field type ground start This field tells the system what kind of signaling to use on this trunk group To prevent glare Avaya recommends ground start signaling for most two wa...

Page 357: ...dentified by the trunk access code used on the call The call is recorded to the extension number assigned to the phone where the call was originated or answered Restrictions Abbreviated Dialing can be...

Page 358: ...pplication you may need to coordinate additional administration with your service provider Before you start Before you can administer any trunk group you must have one or more circuit packs of the cor...

Page 359: ...is field defines whether a trunk group can carry voice data or both Analog trunks only carry voice and voice grade data If you re administering a T1 connection in North America type rbavd in this fiel...

Page 360: ...ields that aren t specifically mentioned in the following instructions Your Avaya representative or network service provider can give you more information Your settings in the following fields must ma...

Page 361: ...circuit pack or its destination 3 In the Bit Rate field type 1 544 This is the standard for T1 lines 4 In the Line Coding field type b8zs Avaya recommends you use b8zs whenever your service provider...

Page 362: ...l have to administer your circuit packs and trunk groups to match the protocol used by your central office Enhanced DS1 administration Normally you can t change the DS1 Circuit Pack screen unless you...

Page 363: ...her screens and resubmit them Specific combinations of settings for some of these fields are shown below ITC Bit Rate and Line Coding The ITC Information Transfer Capability field appears on the Route...

Page 364: ...t packs and trunk groups to match the protocol used by your central office If you re using Incoming Caller ID ICLID on analog trunks connected to a DIOD Central Office trunk circuit pack DO NOT put th...

Page 365: ...ally if an enterprise is using the proxy of a SIP service provider than this field would contain the domain name for that service provider j Ensure that the DTMF over IP field is set to the default va...

Page 366: ...trunk group 5 with another trunk group just type the information for the new trunk group over the old entries Remember to press ENTER to save your changes 2 In the Station screen for extension 8410 c...

Page 367: ...he entry in the Mode field must correspond to the actual setting on the circuit pack 6 In the Type field type t1 comp An entry in this field is only required for some circuit packs 7 Repeat steps 3 6...

Page 368: ...e your changes Communication Manager will automatically clear the other fields associated with these 2 trunks TRUNK GROUP Administered Members min max 3 5 Total Administered Members 5 GROUP MEMBER ASS...

Page 369: ...he string 3 In the Digits field type 6 For insertion this field defines the specific digits to insert Communication Manager will add a 6 to the front of the digit strings delivered with incoming calls...

Page 370: ...The Expected Digits field doesn t appear on the screen for tie trunk groups 5 Press ENTER to save your changes Related topics See Adding a DID Trunk Group on page 353 for instructions on administering...

Page 371: ...business the call is for and how to answer it 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the other two businesses You can enter up to 20 different listed directory numbers on this screen 5 Press ENTER to save your ch...

Page 372: ...r Avaya representative or see Answer detection on page 1359 for an introduction Before you start Determine whether the trunk group receives answer supervision from your service provider or private net...

Page 373: ...ses a data module to save and restore the announcements from the integrated announcement circuit pack and your system s memory You need to set up the data module that is built into the announcement ci...

Page 374: ...ack a TN750 circuit pack or for the Avaya S8100 Media Server only on the Integrated Scalable Speech Processor Application ISSPA circuit pack or G700 Media Gateway embedded VAL announcements hereafter...

Page 375: ...he Pro protected field type n If you enter n users with console permissions can change the announcement If you enter y the announcement cannot be changed This field appears only if the Type field is i...

Page 376: ...llowed by the announcement session If an announcement session is already in progress or if a save or restore command is in progress then the user hears reorder tone fast busy and the system drops the...

Page 377: ...hone hang up If your analog phone is not connected through lineside DS1 the system records an electrical click at the end of the recording You have to redial the announcement feature access code to co...

Page 378: ...are lost if they are not saved to system memory before power is shut down or the circuit pack is reset or removed For extra security you may also want to save announcements from announcement circuit...

Page 379: ...e announcement command failed or the save translations were not run before rebooting N A appears in these fields Copying Announcements NOTE This task only applies if you are using a TN750 series annou...

Page 380: ...system memory stored on a disk to the integrated announcement circuit pack on our system To restore announcements from system memory to the integrated announcement circuit pack 1 Type restore announce...

Page 381: ...specific TN2501AP circuit pack or VVAL gateway by location 1 At the SAT type list integrated annc boards and press ENTER 2 Determine the extension s for the announcement s that you want to delete Rec...

Page 382: ...With a barge in queue you do not need a separate port for each announcement For example you can set up an Automatic Wakeup announcement to repeat and use a barge in queue When guests pick up the phon...

Page 383: ...ateway s that will provide announcements enabled in order for announcement extensions assigned to that gateway to be played Each G700 Media Gateway that will be used to provide announcements through t...

Page 384: ...can record announcements in many ways Professional or computer recordings Recording new announcements at a computer Recording announcements at a system phone Task Information source The G700 Media Ga...

Page 385: ...activated to perform a FLASH auto save backup 5 minutes later If you try to record a new announcement during this backup process the new recording fails and a denial event is logged to the Event Repor...

Page 386: ...use on either system If you need to convert an announcement file to the required format you can use a sound recording utility application to do so To convert a previously recorded announcement or a f...

Page 387: ...ave As the announcement with these formats Format PCM Bits Sample 8 Sample Rate 8KHz Mono channels 1 NOTE The recording conversion utility requires that announcement files are in PCM format VAL files...

Page 388: ...nt files on the VAL circuit pack 1 At the SAT type busyout board board location and press ENTER Ensure that the command is successful NOTE When the VAL board is busied out both the RSCL and ethernet p...

Page 389: ...on into the VAL circuit pack involves 1 Preparing the VAL circuit pack for the FTP session which allows an FTP session on an individual VAL circuit pack creates an ftp login and ftp password for that...

Page 390: ...VAL circuit pack the system denies a second attempt to establish an FTP session from some other remote host The VAL circuit pack has two user accessible directories annc for playable announcements roo...

Page 391: ...you have adequate storage space for backup on the remote host computer Depending on the number of announcements and file type 60 minutes of recording may require up to 32 megabytes of storage space fo...

Page 392: ...TE The announcement file is only removed from volatile RAM memory Approximately 5 minutes later the file is removed from nonvolatile ROM flash memory 3 List the contents of the announcement directory...

Page 393: ...busy signal is returned at the first play attempt 4 Re record this announcement with the same filename at a phone see Recording VAL announcements at a system phone on page 386 Instructions To copy an...

Page 394: ...e 6 Set up a new FTP session into the destination VAL circuit pack see Setting up an FTP session 7 At the FTP client type put filename wav and press ENTER Example put Closed wav 8 List the VAL announc...

Page 395: ...Communication Manager over a LAN connection VAL Manager offers the following basic features Simplified administration to add change and remove Avaya Communication Manager announcement information The...

Page 396: ...e display events and press ENTER The Events Report screen appears This input screen helps you focus the report on events of a certain type or from a certain time period Figure 43 Event Report screen d...

Page 397: ...e A good announcement file format must be 8Kbps sample rate 8 bit resolution bits per sample A law or Mu law companding format Mono channels 1 You must also have the same companding mode administered...

Page 398: ...that is to hear a non barge in announcement on that source is connected to an available port until each port has one caller connected Initially 31 callers can be hearing an announcement from a single...

Page 399: ...e that only files with a wav extension in the annc directly are backed up to FLASH Avaya Communication Manager announcement synchronicity As mentioned above there is a separation between the actual fi...

Page 400: ...ecording from the handset of your telephone you record from a TTY device The device is attached to your phone either by using an acoustic coupler into which you place the telephone handset or by plugg...

Page 401: ...fine Each paging zone requires 1 port See the Hardware Guide for Avaya Communication Manager for information on specific circuit packs Instructions As an example we will set up voice paging for an off...

Page 402: ...g TAC field and 1 in the Voice Paging COR field By completing this row you allow users to page all zones at once You do not have to assign a port to this row 9 Press ENTER to save your changes You can...

Page 403: ...ark an active call on their own extensions Users with console permission can park a call on any extension by dialing the trunk access code the extension Attendants or users with console permissions ma...

Page 404: ...type 80 Use this field to assign the trunk access code users dial to page this zone You cannot assign the same trunk access code to more than one zone 5 In the Code Calling COR field type 1 Use this...

Page 405: ...g Assign individual trunk access codes to Autodial buttons CODE CALLING IDs ID ASSIGNMENTS Id Ext Id Ext Id Ext Id Ext Id Ext 111 2130 141 _______ 221 _______ 251 _______ 331 _______ 112 2131 142 ____...

Page 406: ...remote callers can also make loudspeaker pages Related Topics See Paging Over Speakerphones below for another way to let users page See Loudspeaker paging on page 1597 for detailed information on chi...

Page 407: ...field type Sales staff This name appears on callers phone displays when they page the group 4 In the COR field type 5 Any user who wants to page this group must have permission to call COR 5 5 In the...

Page 408: ...tension can hear the pager s voice other parties on the call cannot hear it and the person making the page cannot hear anyone on the call Before you start Before you administer whisper paging Your Com...

Page 409: ...e assign this function to a button with a lamp so the user can tell when blocking is active You cannot administer this button to a soft key To allow users to make a whisper page by dialing a feature a...

Page 410: ...make an intercom call to extension 2010 The length of this code must exactly match the entry in the Length of Dial Code field 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for the remaining extensions Dial codes don t have...

Page 411: ...number of the intercom group in the Grp field beside the Dial Intercom button You can also give one user instant one way access to another For example to give user A instant one way access to user B...

Page 412: ...up Automatic Answer Intercom Calls Automatic Answer Intercom Calls Auto Answer ICOM allows a user to answer an intercom call within the intercom group without pressing the intercom button Auto Answer...

Page 413: ...ON FEATURE OPTIONS LWC Reception spe Auto Select Any Idle Appearance n LWC Activation y Coverage Msg Retrieval y LWC Log External Calls n Auto Answer none CDR Privacy n Data Restriction n Redirect Not...

Page 414: ...l a feature access code verify the Service Observing Remote By FAC field is y If the appropriate field is not enabled contact your Avaya representative Instructions SECURITY ALERT Listening to someone...

Page 415: ...ing the button 4 To activate the warning tone type y in the Service Observing Warning Tone field on the Feature Related System Parameters screen A unique 2 second 440 Hz warning tone plays before an o...

Page 416: ...Managing Group Communications Observing Calls 416 Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager November 2003...

Page 417: ...uipment Printers Local area networks LAN You enable these connections using a large variety of data communications equipment such as Modems Data Modules Asynchronous Data Units ADU Modem Pools Data mo...

Page 418: ...nister all fields Processor Trunk Data Module Data Line Data Module 3 On the Modem Pool Group screen administer the Circuit Pack Assignments field See Modem Pool Group on page 1070 for more informatio...

Page 419: ...re line and starts over with a new DIAL prompt Table 8 Call progress messages 1 of 2 Message Application Meaning DIAL DCP Equivalent to dial tone Enter the desired number or FAC followed by Enter CMD...

Page 420: ...ition in queue PROCESSING DCP BRI Out of queue Facility is available TIMEOUT DCP BRI Time is exceeded Call terminates FORWARDED DCP BRI Equivalent to redirection notification signal Called terminal ac...

Page 421: ...iated with the busy data module If the user hangs up the call disconnects Return of a data call to the telephone implies that the same data call is continued in the voice mode or transferred to point...

Page 422: ...bling the capacity of the BRI circuit pack When you change the configuration of a BRI from point to point to multipoint the original endpoint does not need to reinitialize Only endpoints that support...

Page 423: ...835 3366 to make a call Users need to remember only the alpha name of the far end terminating point Alphanumeric Dialing allows you to change a mapped string digit dialing address without having to i...

Page 424: ...als are connected to the system by a data module Users should store the destination number in the abbreviated dialing list for future reference Interactions Call Forwarding All Calls A Data Hotline ca...

Page 425: ...e Single Line Telephone If you activate Data Privacy or assign Data Restriction to a station involved in a bridged call and the primary terminal or bridging user attempts to bridge onto the call this...

Page 426: ...stinations by typing d a space the complete address and press ENTER after the CMD prompt NOTE DU type hunt groups connecting the system to a terminal server on a host computer have hunt group extensio...

Page 427: ...ata Restriction Attendant Call Waiting and Call Waiting Termination If Data Restriction is active Call Waiting is denied Busy Verification Busy Verification cannot be active when Data Restriction is a...

Page 428: ...ot be used on calls to or from a Data Only Off Premises Extension Interactions Telephone Dialing An on premises multiappearance telephone may have a Data Extension button associated with the TDM used...

Page 429: ...odule Ethernet data module See Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya Communication Manager for more information Point to Point Protocol PPP data module See Administration for Network Conne...

Page 430: ...vide voice and data communications to 7400D series phones and 602A1 CALLMASTER phones that have a connection to a data terminal or personal computer The data modules integrate data and voice into the...

Page 431: ...for the 7500 and 8500 Series of ISDN BRI phones thus providing connection to the ISDN network The ADM provides integrated voice and data on the same phone and supports data rates of 300 1200 2400 480...

Page 432: ...data module when it is used in an AC Data Hotline Do not assign a hotline destination to a data module that is used in an AC Terminal Dialing Turn off terminal dialing for data modules involved in an...

Page 433: ...ble Access is denied by class of restriction COR facilities restriction level FRL or bearer capability class BCC Or an attempt is made to route voice band data over SDDN trunks in the public switch ne...

Page 434: ...AC drops prematurely you must invoke either auto restoration or fast retry to determine whether auto restoration is attempted for an active AC If you option AC for auto restoration and the connection...

Page 435: ...witch node carriers 3 On the Access Endpoint screen administer all fields See Access Endpoint on page 619 for more information 4 Choose one of the following trunk groups and administer all fields See...

Page 436: ...or in an AC Facility Test Calls The feature does not apply to access endpoints because an access endpoint acts as an endpoint rather than as a trunk Modem Pooling If you require a modem in an AC one i...

Page 437: ...Combined conversion modem pools can be used with all systems The system can detect the needs for a modem Data calls from an analog data endpoint require that the user indicate the need for a modem be...

Page 438: ...uld affect TDM bus blocking characteristics Tandem switches or servers do not insert a pooled modem The originating and terminating servers or switches insert a pooled modem Interactions Call Detail R...

Page 439: ...o link to the server or media server Group 1 shown in Figure 46 DCP PC interface configuration Group 1 on page 439 uses the following connections The PC Interface card plugs into an expansion slot on...

Page 440: ...a handset or headset Figure 47 ISDN BRI PC interface configuration Group 2 PC Interface users have multiple appearances depending on the software application used for their assigned extension Designat...

Page 441: ...he 7405D with PC Interface BRI terminals normally are initializing terminals and require you to assign an SPID The PC ISDN Platform Group 2 in a stand alone configuration is a non initializing BRI ter...

Page 442: ...for standard narrowband communication Certain applications like video conferencing require greater bandwidth You can combine several narrowband channels into one wideband channel to accommodate the e...

Page 443: ...a gateway to many types of high bandwidth traffic In addition DS1 converters are used for wideband switching at remote locations Performed using one of the three allocation algorithms fixed flexible o...

Page 444: ...RI endpoint boundaries as administered on Avaya Communication Manager when handling both incoming to the endpoint applications and outgoing calls Line side T1 or E1 ISDN PRI facility A line side ISDN...

Page 445: ...cuit pack is the interface for line side and network facilities carrying wideband calls Non signaling configuration Wideband also can support configurations using non signaling non ISDN PRI line side...

Page 446: ...tail inventory or distributions for example airline fare schedules These updates are primarily done after business hours and are often referred to as nightly file transfers Wideband meets the high ban...

Page 447: ...t signaling group the system moves its search to the channels in the next higher signaling group For example if three facilities having signaling group interface identifier combinations of 1 1 1 2 and...

Page 448: ...artially contaminated On an E1 facility however a D channel is not considered a busy trunk because H11 and H12 calls may still be placed on that facility an E1 facility with a D channel and idle B cha...

Page 449: ...attempts to preserve idle facilities when offered B H0 and N x DS0 calls This is important so that N x DS0 calls for large values of N have a better chance of being satisfied by a given trunk group H...

Page 450: ...king Communication Manager selects trunks for both wideband and narrowband calls to maximize availability of idle fixed channels for H0 H11 and H12 calls and idle floating channels for N x DS0 calls t...

Page 451: ...point extension cannot be administered as a coverage point in a call coverage path Call Detail Recording When CDR is active for the trunk group all wideband calls generate CDR records The feature flag...

Page 452: ...The interface allows adjunct applications to access switching features and supply routing information to Communication Manager CallVisor ASAI improves Automatic Call Distribution ACD agents call hand...

Page 453: ...tions over which various event reports can be sent see Avaya CallVisor ASAI Technical Reference Considerations If your system has an expansion cabinet with or without duplication ASAI resources should...

Page 454: ...tation nnnn and press ENTER where nnnn is the extension you want to assign to the ASAI adjunct The Station screen appears 2 In the Type field type asai if this adjunct platform is other than CentreVu...

Page 455: ...d press ENTER Make sure that the Ethernet port on the C LAN is administered If the Ethernet port is not listed add it with the add data module command the Service Type field should be Ethernet and the...

Page 456: ...plete the DLG Administration page to add your client information NOTE For additional information on DLG administration for the S8300 Media Server see Avaya CallVisor ASAI Technical Reference PC Interf...

Page 457: ...interface configuration Group 2 on page 440 uses PC ISDN Interface cards up to four cards which plug into expansion slots on the PC These cards each provide 2 standard 8 pin modular jack connections...

Page 458: ...se up to 4 separate PC ISDN Interface cards on the same PC Assign each card a separate extension and assign each extension one or more appearances The availability of specific features depends on the...

Page 459: ...he 7405D with PC Interface BRI terminals normally are initializing terminals and require you to assign an SPID The PC ISDN Platform Group 2 in a stand alone configuration is a non initializing BRI ter...

Page 460: ...for standard narrowband communication Certain applications like video conferencing require greater bandwidth You can combine several narrowband channels into one wideband channel to accommodate the e...

Page 461: ...a gateway to many types of high bandwidth traffic In addition DS1 converters are used for wideband switching at remote locations Performed using one of the three allocation algorithms fixed flexible o...

Page 462: ...RI endpoint boundaries as administered on Avaya Communication Manager when handling both incoming to the endpoint applications and outgoing calls Line side T1 or E1 ISDN PRI facility A line side ISDN...

Page 463: ...cuit pack is the interface for line side and network facilities carrying wideband calls Non signaling configuration Wideband also can support configurations using non signaling non ISDN PRI line side...

Page 464: ...tail inventory or distributions for example airline fare schedules These updates are primarily done after business hours and are often referred to as nightly file transfers Wideband meets the high ban...

Page 465: ...t signaling group the system moves its search to the channels in the next higher signaling group For example if three facilities having signaling group interface identifier combinations of 1 1 1 2 and...

Page 466: ...artially contaminated On an E1 facility however a D channel is not considered a busy trunk because H11 and H12 calls may still be placed on that facility an E1 facility with a D channel and idle B cha...

Page 467: ...attempts to preserve idle facilities when offered B H0 and N x DS0 calls This is important so that N x DS0 calls for large values of N have a better chance of being satisfied by a given trunk group H...

Page 468: ...king Communication Manager selects trunks for both wideband and narrowband calls to maximize availability of idle fixed channels for H0 H11 and H12 calls and idle floating channels for N x DS0 calls t...

Page 469: ...point extension cannot be administered as a coverage point in a call coverage path Call Detail Recording When CDR is active for the trunk group all wideband calls generate CDR records The feature flag...

Page 470: ...The interface allows adjunct applications to access switching features and supply routing information to Communication Manager CallVisor ASAI improves Automatic Call Distribution ACD agents call hand...

Page 471: ...tions over which various event reports can be sent see Avaya CallVisor ASAI Technical Reference Considerations If your system has an expansion cabinet with or without duplication ASAI resources should...

Page 472: ...Telephony Instructions To set up CallVisor ASAI 1 Type add cti link n and press ENTER where n is the CTI link number The CTI Link screen appears Figure 54 CTI Link screen 2 In the Ext field type an u...

Page 473: ...C LAN is not listed the Type field should display C LAN and the previously administered node name should appear in the Node Name Local Node field add a C LAN 5 Type list data module and press ENTER Ma...

Page 474: ...ear in the Service Type field and the previously administered node name should appear in the Node Name field add a PROCR Administering CTI Links Summary Use this information to familiarize yourself wi...

Page 475: ...ister the G700 Media Gateway and its internal processors typically using the P330 Device Manager web based tool or a command line interface CLI the S8300 Media Server using the S8300 Media Server Web...

Page 476: ...stack processor administration typically done by Services personnel S8300 Media Server faceplate For S8300 Media Servers Figure 56 S8300 Media Server faceplate on page 476 shows the faceplate of the S...

Page 477: ...onfigured either as the primary call processing controller or as a Local Survivable Processor LSP An LSP can take over call processing if the primary call processing system such as another S8300 Media...

Page 478: ...ntil the standby unit is rebooted If the standby S8300 Media Server is rebooted all devices will return to using the primary media server for call processing service Any calls in progress on the LSP w...

Page 479: ...luding Avaya Site Administration Contact your Avaya representative to obtain a copy of this program if desired Command line interface administration For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers Instead of using...

Page 480: ...rocedures This section covers highlights of media server administration Accessing the Media Server Web Interface For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers The Web Interface can be accessed through the corpora...

Page 481: ...ensitive Enter the login ID and confirmation information in upper or lowercase as required 5 Enter your login confirmation information as prompted Password prompt Type your password in the Password fi...

Page 482: ...file transfer protocol FTP to another server or computer for backup The S8700 Media Server has a local removable storage device For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers The web interface allows you to back...

Page 483: ...ons to a services agency to a corporate NMS or both For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers To activate SNMP alarm notification for the S8300 and S8700 devices use the Configure Trap Destinations screen to...

Page 484: ...on SAT is available through the Avaya Site Administration package Security Considerations For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers Levels of security for administration of the G700 Media Gateway are the same...

Page 485: ...minal Emulator or ASA on page 486 Use Avaya Terminal Emulator for Modem Connection to Communication Manager on page 488 This connection requires you to have a modem on your PC It also requires you to...

Page 486: ...sers or Only for myself as appropriate 6 On the Completing the Network Connection Wizard screen type the name you want to use for this connection This name will appear in the Network and Dial up Conne...

Page 487: ...he Dial field is blank enter the appropriate telephone number 4 Click the Dial button When the media server s modem answers the system displays the After Dial Terminal window 5 Log on to the LAN a Ent...

Page 488: ...b The system displays the Network tab 10 In the IP address field type the IP address of the Media Server 11 In the TCP IP port number field type 5023 to log in directly to the Communication Manager SA...

Page 489: ...directly to the Communication Manager SAT command line 12 In the Modem field use the dragdown box to select the type of modem that your PC uses 13 In the Serial port field select the COM port you are...

Page 490: ...n type dialog box displays 11 Click the I want to login manually each time radio button 12 Click Next The switch summary dialog box displays 13 Check the information use the Back button to make correc...

Page 491: ...a gateway registers once then remains populated The list configuration media gateway x command allows you to list all the assigned ports on the media modules for the G700 Media Gateway specified by it...

Page 492: ...ituations that require customization this screen is administered on a per IP network regional basis Items to customize include Enabling or disabling of RTCP monitoring Modifications to the report flow...

Page 493: ...nistering log in permissions for SNMP To set up a Communication Manager SNMP agent CMSA you first need the ability to display administration commands and get system measurements Instructions 1 On the...

Page 494: ...field type y 8 In the Maintain Process Circuit Packs field type y 9 In the Maintain Enhanced DS1 field type y 10 Press ENTER to save your changes Adding trap destinations A trap destination is an IP...

Page 495: ...on for the destination of the traps You may select one or more than one version 6 Complete the fields associated with the version s you selected SNMP version 1 In the Community name field enter the SN...

Page 496: ...for example hon3yb38r If you selected privacy as your security model then complete the Authentication Password field as described in the previous paragraph Also in the Privacy Password field type a t...

Page 497: ...sion 3 read only and read write users If a user has been administered its information displays Passwords do not display stars display to show a password has been administered If a privacy password is...

Page 498: ...ss to the SNMP master agent or MIB II sub agent running on this server If you check the Enable busy out release and QOS parameter setting box this CMSA can be used to busyout and release boards ports...

Page 499: ...r entry must be in any alphanumeric format and up to 50 characters in length NOTE If you did not do Step 14 you cannot do Step 15 15 Optional In the Privacy Password field type the security password 1...

Page 500: ...or S8700 Media Server you must turn on network access for the SNMP ports to allow SNMP access to Communication Manager To turn on or turn off network access for SNMP ports complete the following steps...

Page 501: ...croll down to the fields for SNMP These are snmp 161 tcp snmp 161 udp snmptrap 1 4 Click on the Input to Server and Output to Server boxes to either turn the ports on or turn them off When a check app...

Page 502: ...Administering Media Servers SNMP Agents 502 Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager November 2003...

Page 503: ...rage A system called a poller may then take these records and send them to the call accounting system The call accounting system sorts them and produces reports that you can use to compute call costs...

Page 504: ...round start Outgoing Dial Type tone Cut Through n Trunk Termination rc Disconnect Timing msec 500_ Auto Guard n Call Still Held n Sig Bit Inversion none Trunk Gain high Disconnect Supervision In y Out...

Page 505: ...s is called Call Splitting There are many other variations that you can administer for CDR and these are described in the screens section of this book Related topics For additional information on CDR...

Page 506: ...nt codes before they make calls By doing this you can have a record of how much time was spent on the phone doing business with or for a particular client Instructions In this example we are going to...

Page 507: ...office to enter an account code before making international calls 1 Type change system parameters cdr and press ENTER The CDR System Parameters screen appears 2 In the Force Entry of Acct Code for Cal...

Page 508: ...ities that you want to restrict With this method all users with this COR must enter account codes before making any outgoing trunk calls See Class of Restriction on page 682 for more information chang...

Page 509: ...NOTE This service is not offered by the public network in some countries including the U S Collecting call charge information over ISDN In this example we administer the system to provide Advice of Ch...

Page 510: ...nk group 2 In the CDR Reports field type y This ensures that the PPM information appears on the CDR report 3 In the Direction field type two way 4 In the PPM field type y 5 In the Frequency field type...

Page 511: ...s in progress and at the end of the call Instructions In this example we administer extension 5040 to be able to view the charge of a call in progress The charges will appear in currency units in this...

Page 512: ...rable performance impact 8 Press ENTER to save your changes 9 Now assign extension 5040 a disp chrg button to give this user the ability to control the charge display See Adding Feature Buttons on pag...

Page 513: ...way the print qualifier is supported on Linux and Windows platforms only when the command has been entered on a 4410 emulation terminal type Entering the print qualifier using emulation of any other t...

Page 514: ...location 1 MAX or all partition 1 8 schedule Action Object Qualifier Action Object Qualifier change aar digit conversion Enter digits between 0 to 9 x or X change ars digit conversion Enter digits be...

Page 515: ...t list 0 9 4 digit list 00 99 list 1 2 Action Object Qualifier add abbreviated dialing group 1 MAX or next change abbreviated dialing group 1 MAX display abbreviated dialing group 1 MAX print or sched...

Page 516: ...xt or next change access endpoint xxxx assigned ext display access endpoint xxxx assigned ext print or schedule duplicate access endpoint xxxx ext remove access endpoint xxxx ext list access endpoint...

Page 517: ...ias station print or schedule Action Object Qualifier change alphanumeric dial table entry alpha name next display alphanumeric dial table entry alpha name print or schedule Action Object Qualifier ch...

Page 518: ...net 1 MAX carrier A E slot disk or removable media to cabinet 1 MAX carrier A E slot save announcements SPE A SPE B active standby either both disk or removable media from cabinet 1 MAX carrier A E sl...

Page 519: ...attendant 1 MAX Action Object Qualifier change authorization code auth 4 13 digit number display authorization code auth 4 13 digit number print or schedule list authorization code start code count n...

Page 520: ...e 1 or 2 1 Directs the system to use the Image 1 firmware file 2 Directs the system to use the Image 2 firmware file Action Object Qualifier change bulletin board display bulletin board print or sched...

Page 521: ...g display cama numbering print or schedule Action Object Qualifier change system parameters cdr display system parameters cdr print or schedule Action Object Qualifier status clan ip c lan board locat...

Page 522: ...print or schedule Action Object Qualifier change permissions login id display permissions login id print or schedule Action Object Qualifier change console parameters display console parameters print...

Page 523: ...h x to path x count n print or schedule remove coverage path 1 MAX Action Object Qualifier add coverage time of day 1 MAX or next change coverage time of day 1 MAX display coverage time of day 1 MAX p...

Page 524: ...1 100 or clear Action Object Qualifier Action Object Qualifier add data module extension or next change data module extension display data module extension print or schedule list data module ext x to...

Page 525: ...analysis display dialplan analysis print or schedule Action Object Qualifier change dialplan parameters display dialplan parameters print or schedule Action Object Qualifier change digit absorption 0...

Page 526: ...ule V1 V9 change ds1 cabinet 1 MAX carrier A E slot OR gateway 1 MAX module V1 V9 print or schedule display ds1 cabinet 1 MAX carrier A E slot OR gateway 1 MAX module V1 V9 print or schedule list meas...

Page 527: ...rrier A E slot print set boot image cabinet 1 MAX carrier A E slot image 1 or 2 Action Object Qualifier change extended pickup group 1 MAX display extended pickup group 1 MAX print or schedule list ex...

Page 528: ...o cos x count n print or schedule Action Object Qualifier change feature access codes display feature access codes print or schedule Action Object Qualifier change system parameters features display s...

Page 529: ...ters hospitality display system parameters hospitality print or schedule Action Object Qualifier add hunt group 1 MAX or next change hunt group 1 MAX display hunt group 1 MAX number x to number x coun...

Page 530: ...intercom group 1 MAX print or schedule list intercom group number x to number x count n print or schedule remove intercom group 1 MAX Action Object Qualifier change ixc codes display ixc codes print...

Page 531: ...or clan add ip interface cabinet 1 MAX carrier A E slot 1 MAX procr change ip interface cabinet 1 MAX carrier A E slot procr display ip interface cabinet 1 MAX carrier A E slot procr schedule remove i...

Page 532: ...up to 15 characters list usage node name node name print or schedule Action Object Qualifier display system parameters ip options 1 MAX print or schedule Action Object Qualifier add ip route 1 MAX or...

Page 533: ...Action Object Qualifier change isdn public unknown numbering display isdn public unknown numbering print or schedule Action Object Qualifier change isdn tandem calling party number Action Object Qual...

Page 534: ...malicious call trace display display messages malicious call trace print or schedule change display messages miscellaneous features display display messages miscellaneous features print or schedule c...

Page 535: ...er change paging loudspeaker display paging loudspeaker print or schedule Action Object Qualifier list measurements announcements all yesterday peak today peak or last hour print or schedule list meas...

Page 536: ...gateway 1 MAX print or schedule remove media gateway 1 MAX Action Object Qualifier change system parameters mode code display system parameters mode code print Action Object Qualifier add modem pool n...

Page 537: ...and slot change pgate Enter circuit pack cabinet carrier and slot display pgate Enter circuit pack cabinet carrier and slot remove pgate Enter circuit pack cabinet carrier and slot Action Object Qual...

Page 538: ...dpoint extension display pri endpoint extension print or schedule list pri endpoint extension count 1 MAX print or schedule remove pri endpoint extension Action Object Qualifier change isdn qsig dcs t...

Page 539: ...hedule remove remote office 1 MAX status remote office 1 MAX print Action Object Qualifier change rhnpa Enter RHNPA and code n xxx n 1 MAX x 0 MAX x 0 MAX x 0 MAX display rhnpa Enter RHNPA and code n...

Page 540: ...up 1 MAX print or schedule remove signaling group 1 MAX Action Object Qualifier change site data display site data print or schedule list set data extension Action Object Qualifier add station extensi...

Page 541: ...hange system parameters coverage forwarding display system parameters coverage forwarding print or schedule Action Object Qualifier display system parameters country options print or schedule Action O...

Page 542: ...t Qualifier change tenant 1 MAX display tenant 1 MAX print or schedule Action Object Qualifier change terminal parameters display terminal parameters schedule Action Object Qualifier add term ext grou...

Page 543: ...time of day 1 MAX routing plan number print or schedule Action Object Qualifier change toll Enter digits between 0 9 x or X location 1 MAX or all min 1 28 display toll Enter digits between 0 9 x or X...

Page 544: ...igits q qsig print list trace vdn extension print or schedule list trace vector 1 MAX Action Object Qualifier add trunk group 1 MAX or next change trunk group 1 MAX or TAC X display trunk group 1 MAX...

Page 545: ...nk number print or schedule Action Object Qualifier list usage extension extension number vector print or schedule Action Object Qualifier change vector 1 MAX list usage vector 1 MAX Action Object Qua...

Page 546: ...s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager November 2003 XMOBILE Station to Cell Phone Mapping Partial string of a cell phone number followed by the wildcard Action Object Qualifier list xmobile mapping...

Page 547: ...Station screen this section includes figures for those phones to which you can assign feature buttons This section includes descriptions of the following telephones 500 telephones on page 547 2402 te...

Page 548: ...When the 2402 has its own native administration the Messages button will be handled differently and there will be 12 administrable feature buttons For details on setting up pound key as an autodial f...

Page 549: ...l mode so you do not have to assign a Date Time button to these phones 4602 IP telephone The 4602 IP telephone has separate LEDs to indicate the on off status of the speakerphone and mute buttons The...

Page 550: ...the 4620 is downloaded automatically to the phone when a link is established between the switch and the phone There are three speakerphone options on the 4620 Labels on the 4620 can be downloaded in...

Page 551: ...ingle line analog models They have 10 programmable dialing buttons These phones also have fixed Flash Redial and Hold feature buttons and a message waiting light 6220 telephone The 6220 telephones are...

Page 552: ...re notes 1 Handset 2 Handset cord jack 3 Flash button 4 Redial button 5 Hold button 6 DATA jack 7 Ringer volume control 8 Message light 9 Handset volume control 10 Dial pad 11 LINE jack on bottom of p...

Page 553: ...cord jack 5 Flash button 6 Redial button 7 Hold button 8 Data jack 9 Personalized ring 10 Ringer volume control 11 10 programmable dialing buttons 12 Pause button 13 Message light 14 Handset speakerph...

Page 554: ...jack 6 Handset speakerphone volume control 7 Flash button 8 Redial button 9 Hold button 10 Personalized ring 11 Ringer volume control 12 10 programmable dialing buttons 13 Pause button 14 Message ligh...

Page 555: ...t you can assign a drop button to any feature button The 6400 series display phones show the date and time in Normal mode so you do not have to assign a Date Time button to these phones 6402 telephone...

Page 556: ...res you assign to the call appearance feature buttons NOTE You can connect an XM24 expansion module to the 6416D telephone to expand the number of buttons you can assign However when the expansion mod...

Page 557: ...lay 2 Feature button 3 Hold button 4 Transfer Test button 5 Conf Ring button 6 Dial pad 7 Volume control button 8 Message light 9 Tray handle includes reference cards 10 Redial button 11 Speaker butto...

Page 558: ...be physically bridged to the same analog line port due to the message waiting and loop current circuitry Figure notes 1 Display 2 Softkeys 3 Display control buttons 4 Hold 5 Call appearance feature b...

Page 559: ...e to the message waiting and loop current circuitry 7300 series telephones 7302H MERLIN telephone The 7302H is a 5 button telephone that can be desk or wall mounted This set can no longer be ordered A...

Page 560: ...tem treats the telephone s 24 feature function buttons two lamps each as single green lamp function buttons 7305S telephone The 7305S telephone is a multi appearance hybrid telephone which provides ac...

Page 561: ...e used as Automatic Call Distribution ACD agents and do not allow your end users to access the Directory The following fixed feature buttons do not operate on Hybrid telephones STOP PAUSE RECALL MESSA...

Page 562: ...Reference 731x series hybrid telephones 562 Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager November 2003 Figure 71 7313H telephone BIS 10 Figure notes 1 Handset 2 Dial pad 3 10 programmable bu...

Page 563: ...731x series hybrid telephones Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager 563 November 2003 Figure 72 7314H telephone BIS 22 Figure notes 1 Handset 2 Dial pad 3 10 programmable buttons 4 12...

Page 564: ...731x series hybrid telephones 564 Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager November 2003 Figure 73 7315H telephone BIS 22D Figure notes 1 Handset 2 Dial pad 3 10 programmable buttons 4 12...

Page 565: ...731x series hybrid telephones Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager 565 November 2003 Figure 74 7316H telephone BIS 34 Figure notes 1 Handset 2 Dial pad 3 10 programmable buttons 4 24...

Page 566: ...and the 7401 7401D02A are both single appearance digital phones which have no call appearance buttons or lights but have two virtual call appearances Depending on how the 7401D or the 7401 telephone i...

Page 567: ...e module when no display module is used which adds 20 call appearance feature buttons 7406 telephones The 7406D telephone 7406D01A 7406D02A 7406D03A and 7406D04A models has five call appearance featur...

Page 568: ...splay and a built in calculator This set is AC powered Enhanced 7407D the 7407D02C offers 10 call appearance buttons each with a red in use light and green status light four standard fixed feature but...

Page 569: ...FER three fixed feature buttons with one light each SELECT SPEAKER RESET SPKR and MUTE seven display feature buttons with one light each a Message light personalized ringing a built in speakerphone wi...

Page 570: ...Phone Reference 7400 series telephones 570 Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager November 2003 Figure 77 7404D telephone Figure notes 1 Handset 2 Dial pad 3 6 programmable buttons...

Page 571: ...erence 7400 series telephones Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager 571 November 2003 Figure 78 7405D telephone Figure notes 1 Handset 2 Dial pad 3 10 programmable buttons 4 24 feature...

Page 572: ...ator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager November 2003 Figure 79 7405D telephone with optional function key module Figure notes 1 Handset 2 Dial pad 3 10 programmable buttons 4 24 feature buttons...

Page 573: ...r s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager 573 November 2003 Figure 80 7405D telephone with optional digital display module Figure notes 1 Handset 2 Dial pad 3 Digital display module with 7 display but...

Page 574: ...de for Avaya Communication Manager November 2003 Figure 81 7405D telephone with optional call coverage module Figure notes 1 Handset 2 Dial pad 3 Call coverage module with 20 coverage module buttons a...

Page 575: ...trator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager 575 November 2003 Figure 82 7405D telephone with optional digital terminal data module Figure notes 1 Handset 2 Dial pad 3 10 programmable buttons 4 24 f...

Page 576: ...Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager November 2003 Figure 83 7406D telephone Figure notes 1 Handset 2 Dial pad 3 5 programmable buttons 4 18 feature buttons feature buttons F2 F4 and...

Page 577: ...s Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager 577 November 2003 Figure 84 7406D telephone Figure notes 1 Handset 2 Dial pad 3 5 programmable buttons 4 18 feature buttons feature buttons F12...

Page 578: ...0 series telephones 578 Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager November 2003 Figure 85 7407D telephone Figure notes 1 Handset 2 Dial pad 3 10 programmable buttons 4 7 display buttons 5...

Page 579: ...ce 7400 series telephones Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager 579 November 2003 Figure 86 7434D telephone Figure notes 1 Handset 2 Dial pad 3 10 programmable buttons 4 24 feature but...

Page 580: ...r Avaya Communication Manager November 2003 Figure 87 7434D telephone with optional call coverage module Figure notes 1 Handset 2 Dial pad 3 Call coverage module with 20 coverage module buttons and st...

Page 581: ...uide for Avaya Communication Manager 581 November 2003 Figure 88 7434D telephone with optional digital display module Figure notes 1 Handset 2 Dial pad 3 Digital display module with 7 display buttons...

Page 582: ...nces are not supported NI BRI phones also have access to all features of the Multi level Precedence and Preemption MLPP capability if MLPP has been enabled 7505D ISDN BRI telephone The 7505D telephone...

Page 583: ...hese programmed numbers or codes the Redial feature the Mute feature 8510T ISDN BRI telephone The 8510T voice data telephone offers 10 call appearance feature buttons each with a red and green status...

Page 584: ...Phone Reference ISDN telephones 7500s 8500s 584 Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager November 2003 Figure 89 8503D telephone Figure notes 1 Handset 2 Dial pad 3 3 programmable buttons...

Page 585: ...hone Reference ISDN telephones 7500s 8500s Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager 585 November 2003 Figure 90 8510T telephone Figure notes 1 Handset 2 Dial pad 3 10 programmable buttons...

Page 586: ...d appearances 8110 telephones The basic 8110 8110A01A 8110A01B and 811A01C and the modified 8110M 8110A01D telephones are single line analog telephones These telephones are exactly the same in appeara...

Page 587: ...he 8405D and 8405D allow you to administer 12 softkey feature buttons in addition to the call appearance and feature buttons The four 8405 variations have the following differences The 8405B has a 1 w...

Page 588: ...ese 12 features can be used in addition to the features on the call appearance feature buttons The 8411 telephone can work in both 4 wire and 2 wire environments 8434D telephone The basic 8434 8434D01...

Page 589: ...Phone Reference 8400 series telephones Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager 589 November 2003 Figure 92 8403B telephone Figure notes 1 Handset 2 Dial pad 3 3 programmable buttons...

Page 590: ...or Avaya Communication Manager November 2003 Figure 93 8410B telephone NOTE The 8405B and 8405B look like the 8410B with the exception that the 8405 series do not have the second column of line appear...

Page 591: ...vaya Communication Manager 591 November 2003 Figure 94 8410D telephone NOTE The 8405D and 8405D look like the 8410D with the exception that the 8405 series do not have the second column of line appear...

Page 592: ...erence 8400 series telephones 592 Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager November 2003 Figure 95 8434D telephone Figure notes 1 Handset 2 Dial pad 3 10 programmable buttons 4 24 feature...

Page 593: ...an connect the CALLMASTER III to either a standard 4 wire DCP or a 2 wire circuit pack 603F CALLMASTER IV The CALLMASTER IV model has a display a Message light and the Select Mute Log In and Release b...

Page 594: ...TER telephones 594 Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager November 2003 Figure 96 CALLMASTER II CALLMASTER III digital telephone Figure notes 1 Handset 2 Dial pad 3 6 programmable butto...

Page 595: ...CALLMASTER telephones Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager 595 November 2003 Figure 97 CALLMASTER IV digital telephone Figure notes 1 Handset 2 Dial pad 3 6 programmable buttons 4 15...

Page 596: ...g contacts a Talk indicator a Charge indicator a Message indicator and a base ringer MDW9000 cordless telephone The MDW 9000 Wireless Telephone is part of the TransTalk 9000 Digital Wireless System fa...

Page 597: ...cover a spare battery The radio module has Power Pass and Radio indicator lights a top hook card edge and snap lock which connect the radio module to the carrier assembly backplane an antenna and powe...

Page 598: ...ess telephone 598 Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager November 2003 Figure 100 MDC9000 and MDW9000 cordless telephones Figure notes 1 6 programmable buttons 2 Dial pad 1 6 programmab...

Page 599: ...l telephone Control of DCP Telephone configuration or over UDP RTP to the IP Softphone s iClarity IP Audio H 323 audio end point Road Warrior or VoIP configuration At any time an end user can put a so...

Page 600: ...However since it does not use the IP Softphone interface this configuration is capable of operating only as an analog or single line telephone making one call at a time without any additional assigned...

Page 601: ...of Terminal Station Terminal Type Control of the Terminal Station Regular Control CTI or Shared Control Road Warrior Telecommuter Control of IP Telephone Control of DCP Telephone 2420 Yes Yes N A Yes...

Page 602: ...Phone Reference Internet Protocol IP Softphones 602 Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager November 2003...

Page 603: ...__ _____ ____ ___ n _________________ __ __ _____ ____ ___ n _________________ __ __ _____ ____ ___ n _________________ __ __ _____ ____ ___ n _________________ __ __ _____ ____ ___ n _______________...

Page 604: ...I Restriction on AAR ARS field on the Feature Related System Parameters screen is y Use to drop a call on a Russian Shuttle trunk or Russian Rotary trunk if the ANI request fails Other types of trunks...

Page 605: ...4 entry Valid entries Usage China 1 Call Type alrt alerts attendant consoles or other digital phones when an emergency call is placed normal emer emergency call normal fnpa 10 digit North American Num...

Page 606: ...er Options screen the ARS field and the Multiple Locations field must be set to y for values other than all to appear all Indicates that this ARS Digit Analysis Table is the default for all port netwo...

Page 607: ...e pattern used to route the call 1 to 999 Specifies the route pattern used to route the call For S8300 Media Server only r1 to r32 Specifies the remote home numbering plan area table Complete this fie...

Page 608: ...es of trunks treat r as y Valid entries Usage y n Enter y to allow additional digit conversion change ars digit conversion Page 1 of 2 ARS DIGIT CONVERSION TABLE Location 1 Percent Full ___ Matching P...

Page 609: ...Multiple Locations field must be set to y for values other than all to appear all Indicates that this ARS Digit Conversion Table is the default for all port network cabinet locations Valid entries Usa...

Page 610: ...ore you can program an Enhanced List You can define two Enhanced Abbreviated Dialing List in the system Before you assign numbers to a list you must define whether you want a 3 digit or 4 digit enhanc...

Page 611: ...Vector Directory Number extension may also be assigned Valid entries Usage Digits 0 to 9 Up to 24 characters star Part of FAC pound Part of FAC p Pause 1 5 seconds w Wait for dial tone m Change to ou...

Page 612: ...viated Dialing Group List DIAL CODE Enter the number you want the system to dial when users enter this dial code While the system is waiting a call progress tone receiver is tied up and since there ar...

Page 613: ...lid entries Usage Digits 0 to 9 Up to 24 characters star Part of FAC pound Part of FAC p Pause 1 5 seconds w Wait for dial tone m Change to outpulse DTMF digits at the end to end rate s Start suppress...

Page 614: ...alling capability may be impaired Only 1 through 5 display initially If you enter a number greater than 5 in the Size field the system increases the number of dial codes to the number you specified NO...

Page 615: ...he System Administrator The list can be accessed by users to place local long distance and international calls to activate deactivate features or to access remote computer equipment Page 1 of 7 of the...

Page 616: ...ne sets If this field is changed to another language all administered labels in the original language are saved and the labels for the new language are read in and displayed LABELS FOR 2420 4620 STATI...

Page 617: ...viated Dialing System List screen Figure 110 Abbreviated Dialing System List screen on page 618 shows the last page of the Abbreviated Dialing System screen when on the System Parameters Customer Opti...

Page 618: ...m and it applies to all 7103A fixed feature phones in the system This list is controlled by the System Administrator Pages 1 through 4 of the screen Figure 111 Abbreviated Dialing List 7103A Button Li...

Page 619: ...e trunk An Access Endpoint can be specified as the Originator or Destination endpoint of an administered connection A Wideband Access Endpoint WAE is an endpoint application connected to line side non...

Page 620: ...All Calls feature for access endpoints is prohibited Valid entries Usage voice grade data For an analog tie trunk access endpoint 56k data For a DS1 access endpoint enter as appropriate 64k data is n...

Page 621: ...n field administered as ZCS or B8ZS For an existing access endpoint ITC can only be changed from restricted to unrestricted if its associated port is a channel of a DS1 circuit pack with its Zero Code...

Page 622: ...For Common Channel or ISDN PRI signaling channel use is limited to channels 1 through 30 DS1 Interface circuit pack only or channels 1 through 23 DS1 Interface 32 or DS1 Interface A channel can be adm...

Page 623: ...ppears if the Communication Type field is wideband This field cannot be blank Valid entries Usage 1 through 100 Enter the Tenant Partition number Valid entries Usage 2 to 31 Enter the number of adjace...

Page 624: ...n access or data endpoint This endpoint is the terminating party of the AC and need not be local to the server on which the AC is assigned The entry must be consistent with the local Communication Man...

Page 625: ...or 7406D phone 510D personal terminal 515 BCT 615 BCT or 715 BCT terminal Connection between PC and the server running Avaya Communication Manager ISDN BRI Line circuit pack connections including 750...

Page 626: ...and in this situation these fields should be used only to specify the days on which the AC starts and not other days on which the AC may be active Only appears if the Continuous field is n Start Time...

Page 627: ...feature button ac alarm may be used to indicate the AC alarm Auto Restoration Valid entries Usage 1 through 10 An alarm generates on the first failure if this field is 1 Valid entries Usage major Fail...

Page 628: ...ystem by simply administering the extension as the standard analog type 2500 But if you listed your stations how would you know which extensions are modems Instead you could use the Alias screen to cr...

Page 629: ...ypes Alphanumeric Dialing Table This screen associates alpha names to dialed digit strings This allows telephone users to place a data call by simply typing the alpha name Users need only remember far...

Page 630: ...________________ _____________ ______________________ ____________ ______________________ _____________ ______________________ ____________ ______________________ _____________ ______________________...

Page 631: ...__ _ _ _ __ _____ 2 ________ _________ 1_ 1_ ________________________ _ _ _ __ _____ 3 ________ _________ 1_ 1_ ________________________ _ _ _ __ _____ 4 ________ _________ 1_ 1_ _____________________...

Page 632: ...th this announcement Valid entries Usage 1 to 8 digits Enter the extension you assign to this announcement The following screens can reference this extension Hunt Group Coverage Path Trunk Group Incom...

Page 633: ...at where aa the cabinet number x the carrier and ss the slot number Valid entries Usage 01 through 44 DEFINITY Server R or 01 through 03 DEFINITY CSI SI or 1 through 64 S8700 IP Connect S8700 Multi Co...

Page 634: ...edded announcement in an Avaya S8100 Media Server with the CMC1 Media Gateway or an S8100 Media Server with the Avaya G600 Media Gateway Valid entries Usage 01 through 50 Media gateway number Valid en...

Page 635: ...barge in announcement can be played through more than one port or all ports of an integrated circuit pack The initial request to play an announcement selects an available port on the board on which t...

Page 636: ...time This rate does not provide a high quality recording Avaya does not recommend this for customer announcements but it is adequate for VDN of Origin announcements 32 32 kbps 4 minutes and 16 second...

Page 637: ...ernal device for a specific period and hang up when finished When the device hangs up the caller hears a click Connects to the server running Avaya Communication Manager through an analog port Ringing...

Page 638: ...Usage y n Enter n to designate a non toll CO code Valid entries Usage 2 through 9 Identify the number of the ARS Toll Table Valid entries Usage 200 299 through 900 999 Identify the block of numbers on...

Page 639: ...indicates only ACD split skill calls and direct agent calls can auto answer Non ACD calls terminated to an attendant console with Auto Answer set to acd ring audibly none Entering none causes all call...

Page 640: ...COR COS Data Module Valid entries Usage principal Puts the attendant console into night service day only Will not get night service calls night only Handles only night service calls day night Handles...

Page 641: ...ll the attendant by dialing the extension or you can assign them an abbreviated dialing button for fast access to the attendant Valid entries Usage y When the field is y the redirection information fo...

Page 642: ...characters Valid entries Usage 1 to 28 Enter the Attendant Group number Valid entries Usage y n Enter y for H 320 compliant calls Valid entries Usage Up to 27 alphanumeric characters Any entry is acce...

Page 643: ...oftConsole IP attendant The required security code length is determined by Minimum Security Code Length on the Feature Related System Parameters screen TN Type 1 through 80 DEFINITY R CSI or 1 through...

Page 644: ...to 3 digits Avaya recommends a DCS trunk be specified as the local TAC between the local and remote servers If the TAC specified as local between the local and remote servers is not a DCS trunk the re...

Page 645: ...de The entry in this field is manipulated by CAMA Numbering Format before being sent over CAMA trunks or similarly by ISDN Numbering Public Unknown before being sent over ISDN trunks For more informat...

Page 646: ...cy calls from remote locations Please contact your Avaya respresentative if you have questions about emergency calls from IP phones Valid entries Usage y n Enter y to allow IP endpoints to be connecte...

Page 647: ...switch that an emergency call routed over the it s trunk reaches the PSAP that covers the server or switch If the media server or switch uses ISDN trunks for emergency calls the digit string is the te...

Page 648: ...Interworking feature COR Enter the desired class of restriction COR number COS Enter the desired COS number to designate allowed features See Class of Service on page 696 for additional information o...

Page 649: ...Line Service allows single line telephone users by simply lifting the handset to automatically place a call to a preassigned destination extension telephone number or feature access code The Hot Line...

Page 650: ...he extension number of a previously administered user who has an associated Data Extension button and who will share the use of the module Name Contains the name assigned to the above extension number...

Page 651: ...o originate a call 1 per console Attendant Control of Trunk Group Access act tr grp Activate trunk group access allows the attendant to control a trunk group All calls going to the trunks are routed t...

Page 652: ...be administered as follows local tgs Local trunk group select allows the attendant to access trunk groups on the local server running Avaya Communication Manager combination of 12 local tgs remote tg...

Page 653: ...are noted as status lamp If a Call Cover Msg Rt cov msg rt button is assigned a Leave Word Calling Delete Msg delete msg button and a Next next button must also be assigned occ rooms Occupied rooms a...

Page 654: ...names must be unique on each server running Avaya Communication Manager Valid entries Usage 1 7 character string Used as a label for the associated IP address The MSA names must be unique on each serv...

Page 655: ...To enhance system security choose Authorization Codes of 13 random digits change authorization code Page 1 of 1 Authorization Code COR Mapping Note XX codes administered Use list to display all codes...

Page 656: ...he Avaya DEFINITY server or media server to compare specified skills identify the skill that will provide the best service to a call and deliver the call to that resource For information on setting up...

Page 657: ...ame Indicates the location Lock Indicates whether this application is locked Maximum Suppression Time Prevents callers from connecting to a VDN within a certain time period after receiving a busy sign...

Page 658: ...ares resources on that server and replies to the origin server with information on the best of these Each remote Avaya server in a given application has to have a dedicated status poll vector Valid en...

Page 659: ...them and displays only one The system also deletes any blank line if it is line one of any page You cannot indent text on the bulletin board The TAB key moves the cursor to the next line Field descri...

Page 660: ...column on the left If you have an init or inads login you can enter high priority information to trigger the high priority message at login time Lines 11 through 19 These lines can be used by anyone w...

Page 661: ...e for additional information Field descriptions for page 1 Figure 127 Call Vector Valid entries Usage A through Z a through z Blank 0 through 9 _ Enter any information change vector 129 Page 1 of 3 CA...

Page 662: ...VECTOR 12 ____________ 13 ____________ 14 ____________ 15 ____________ 16 ____________ 17 ____________ 18 ____________ 19 ____________ 20 ____________ 21 ____________ 22 ____________ Valid entries Usa...

Page 663: ...reatment of a call and removes the call from the server running Avaya Communication Manager Also allows the optional assignment of an announcement that will play immediately before the disconnect goto...

Page 664: ...System Parameters Customer Options screen the Vectoring CINFO field is y EAS A display only field indicating whether on the System Parameters Customer Options screen the Expert Agent Selection EAS fie...

Page 665: ...on the System Parameters Customer Options screen the Enhanced Conferencing field is y This field designates the VDN as a Meet me Conference VDN Valid entries Usage y You do not want this vector to be...

Page 666: ...ESID formats to be sent over multiple CAMA trunk groups allowing for mixed station numbering plans and some limited conversion from non DID to DID numbers typically required by the Private Switch Auto...

Page 667: ...ensions 1100 through 1199 The Ext Code 11 is for a DID block An Ext Code of 126 might point a non DID block to a nearby DID extension 5241666 change cama numbering Page 1 of 15 CAMA NUMBERING E911 FOR...

Page 668: ...f digits to send change system parameters cdr Page 1 of 1 CDR SYSTEM PARAMETERS Node Number Local PBX ID CDR Date Format month day Primary Output Format printer Primary Output Endpoint CDR1 Secondary...

Page 669: ...oose this option no one will be able to make or receive calls if CDR is unable to record them warning Enter warning to stop call recording when the buffer is full This generates a minor alarm attendan...

Page 670: ...he Condition Code of both CDR records for the call will be T n The Condition Codes normally associated with the Record Outgoing Calls Only field are generated Valid entries Usage dialed Use dialed to...

Page 671: ...iptions on page 1460 for more information Valid entries Usage y Enter y to deny all toll calls unless the user dials an account code Forced Entry of Account Codes must be y on the System Parameters Cu...

Page 672: ...Communication Manager If you choose this option you must complete the Intraswitch CDR screen to indicate which extensions should be monitored Valid entries Usage y Enter y to display the circuit ID i...

Page 673: ...e this value if the CDR device is connected over a TCP IP link and this link is defined as either CDR1 or CDR2 on the IP Services screen Valid entries Usage customized Use this option if you have spec...

Page 674: ...ystem Parameters Customer Options screen Record Call Assoc TSC Valid entries Usage 0 7 Enter the number of digits to hide counting from the end right to left For example if you enter 4 in this field a...

Page 675: ...stem Generic 2 2 and Generic 3 V2 DS1 CEPT1 ISDN PRI Reference Record Outgoing Calls Only Remove From Called Number Valid entries Usage y n Enter y to include the Vector Directory Number VDN in the Di...

Page 676: ...Use this if the secondary output device is connected to the eia port This is not a valid option on DEFINITY R systems Extension number This is the extension of the data module if used that links the s...

Page 677: ...s ISDN Layouts provide more accurate information about the inter exchange carrier and ISDN network services used for a call This affects lsu and printer output formats as well as any format with ISDN...

Page 678: ...of 2 CDR SYSTEM PARAMETERS Data Item Length Data Item Length Data Item Length 1 time____________ 4_ 17 ________________ __ 33 ________________ __ 2 space___________ 1_ 18 ________________ __ 34 ______...

Page 679: ...anges clg num in tac 10 ppm 5 code dial 4 res flag 1 code used 4 return 1 cond code 1 sec dur 5 date 6 space 1 dialed num 23 time 4 duration 4 tsc_ct 4 feat flag 1 tsc_flag 1 frl 1 vdn 5 in crt id 3 i...

Page 680: ...ge extension station xxxxxxx command It is recommended that the administrator use the list usage command prior to changing any extensions Figure 133 Change Station Extension NOTE You cannot use the ch...

Page 681: ...nt extension is displayed under From Extension Port This field is read only and displays the port of the existing extension Valid entries for To Extension Usage 0 to 9 Type a new extension for the Eme...

Page 682: ...triction COR Classes of restriction control call origination and termination Your system may use only one COR or as many as necessary to control calling privileges You can assign up to 96 different CO...

Page 683: ...e skills change cor 10 Page 1 of 4 CLASS OF RESTRICTION COR Number 10 COR Description supervisor FRL 0 APLT y Can Be Service Observed n Calling Party Restriction none Can Be A Service Observer y Calle...

Page 684: ...o n Valid entries Usage y Displays call charges during and at the end of the call n Call charges can be seen if users press the disp chrg button before the call drops Valid entries Usage Inward Blocks...

Page 685: ...strictions when practical All toll Blocks the calling party from making ARS and trunk access calls from a facility assigned the COR to certain toll areas as defined in the Dialed String field on the T...

Page 686: ...ervice Observed Note that this field allows or denies service observing for not only physical extensions but also for logical agent IDs and VDNs If you want an observer to observe users set the users...

Page 687: ...nt to the Central Office on request using R2 MFC signaling COR Description COR Number This is a display only field when the screen is accessed via an administration command such as change or display V...

Page 688: ...ociated vector will not be successful Valid entries Usage y n If this is y users may dial an ACD agent s extension directly rather than anyone in the agent pool If the system is in Night Service the c...

Page 689: ...lp troubleshoot problems by first checking its value Valid entries Usage 0 to 7 Enter an originating FRL number AAR and or ARS features use this entry to determine call access to an outgoing trunk gro...

Page 690: ...d there was no ANI Partitioned Group Number This field appears only if AAR ARS Partitioning is y and Time of Day Routing is n on the System Parameters Customer Options screen PASTE Display PBX Data on...

Page 691: ...entries Usage y Enter y to allow the telephone user s calls to be placed ahead of non priority calls in a hunt group queue n If you do not use Automatic Call Distribution ACD is not enabled on the Sy...

Page 692: ...l List column the 538 number is restricted To override this restriction in the Toll Analysis screen enter X in the 5 column under the Unrestricted Call List heading In the Class of Restriction screen...

Page 693: ...s field to add display messages regarding conference and transfer features on digital phones Valid entries Usage y n Y allows the COR administered category to be used for both the calling party and ca...

Page 694: ...y to permit all Brazilian trunks calls that terminate to a station to send back a double answer to the CO This double answer tells the CO that this particular station cannot accept collect calls The C...

Page 695: ...d value i e after 1 998 minutes have elapsed and a second warning tone is heard 30 seconds later The call is automatically disconnected 30 seconds after the second warning tone Valid entries Usage y n...

Page 696: ...stered 0 15 Valid entries Usage y n A y grants permission to observe specific CORs Enter n for each COR number 0 through 95 that cannot be observed by the COR being implemented change cor 10 Page 4 of...

Page 697: ...warding All Calls Allows this user to forward all calls to any extension See Call forwarding on page 1479 for more information Call Forwarding Busy DA Allows this user to forward calls to any extensio...

Page 698: ...nsion or group of extensions Activate Call Forwarding for another extension Add and remove agent skills Record integrated announcements Data Privacy Allows this user to enter a feature access code to...

Page 699: ...ormation QSIG Call Offer Originations Allows this user to invoke QSIG Call Offer services See Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya Communication Manager for more information Restrict Call...

Page 700: ...on number Enter a physical extension not a VDN to assign that extension to a code Otherwise leave this field blank change paging code calling ids Page 1 of 2 CODE CALLING IDs ID ASSIGNMENTS Id Ext Id...

Page 701: ...t display add change or do anything else with that object Administer Features Use caution when assigning this permission to a user Valid entries Usage y n Enter y to create additional restrictions and...

Page 702: ...is set to y on the System Parameters Customer Options screen Valid entries Usage y n Enter y to allow a user to administer logins and command permissions Valid entries Usage y n Enter y to allow a us...

Page 703: ...y on the System Parameters Customer Options screen Maintain Systems You can only enter a value in this field if the Processor and System MSP field is set to y on the System Parameters Customer Option...

Page 704: ...but not Vector Directory Numbers VDN in the Administer Stations and Additional Restrictions fields type y Then on page 2 type vdn as a restricted object Valid entries Usage y n Enter y to allow a use...

Page 705: ...nager extension to an EC500 cell phone Valid entries Usage network Provides a display of only 10 digit numbers For internal calls the ISDN numbering tables are used to create the calling number and DC...

Page 706: ...erated even if this field is y Configuration Set Description Describes the purpose of the configuration set Fast Connect on Origination Determines whether some additional processing occurs on the serv...

Page 707: ...eds to collect digits This option normally would be used for EC500 XMOBILE station calls out of band Expect all digits to be delivered by out of band signaling only The server running Avaya Communicat...

Page 708: ...ting the extension of the alternate facility restriction level FRL activation station Attendant Group Name Enter a name for the attendant group Valid entries Usage 0 through 9 blank Enter up to 4 digi...

Page 709: ...ng Indicates whether or not system users can pick up alerting calls if the attendant queue has reached its warning state Calls In Queue Warning Enter the number of incoming calls that can be in the at...

Page 710: ...s the desired features for the attendant You can override this COR by assigning a different COR on the individual Attendant screen COS Enter a class of service COS number that reflects the desired fea...

Page 711: ...n or provisioning Once a port is assigned either via TTI or by changing the Ext Alert Port field from the G3 MA or other manager terminal the extension is automatically removed and treated as unassign...

Page 712: ...tation is administered by assigning it a night serv button QSIG CAS Number Appears if the CAS field is QSIG branch Contains the complete number of the attendant group at the main server running Avaya...

Page 713: ...path to ensure the entire path is completed before the call returns to the console Time In Queue Warning sec Enter the number of seconds a call can remain in the attendant queue before activating an...

Page 714: ...ght service No Answer Timeout sec Enter the number of seconds a call to the attendant can remain unanswered without invoking a more insistent sounding tone Be sure to allow five seconds for each ring...

Page 715: ...provides three consecutive extension numbers 4300 4301 and 4302 for parking calls The extensions should be assigned to the optional Attendant Selector Console in the 00 through 09 block bottom row in...

Page 716: ...vated CO Call An incoming trunk call CO FX WATS trunk to an attendant group This does not include trunk calls that return to the attendant group after a timeout or deferred attendant recall DID to Att...

Page 717: ...Type Ordering Within Priority Levels If you use call type ordering calls to the attendant are first grouped by the queue priority level then by call type and finally in the order received The call typ...

Page 718: ...field that lists the Tenant Partition number Type Display only field that shows all attendants in the group You administer the individual attendant consoles on the Attendant Console screen change cons...

Page 719: ...ger The members of the group are identified by their extension number Any phone including those administered without hardware X ported but not attendants can be assigned to a coverage answer group Not...

Page 720: ...is makes it possible to follow call coverage for any extension allowing the administrator to easily track call coverage paths Group Number A display only field when the screen is accessed using an adm...

Page 721: ...on in a hunt chain that begins with the hunt to station assigned on the Station screen of the last coverage point n Coverage treatment is terminated the call is left at the last available location pri...

Page 722: ...Calls redirect if at least one call appearance is busy Busy Calls redirect if all call appearances that accept incoming calls are busy Don t Answer Calls redirect when the specified number of rings ha...

Page 723: ...r announcement NOTE If entering a Multi Location Dial Plan shortened extension see the Caution note on page 632 attd Redirects the call to the attendant or attendant group If the system has Centralize...

Page 724: ...arances Crisis Alert System Parameters This screen allows you to define the system parameters associated with sending crisis alert messages Field descriptions Figure 149 Crisis Alert System Parameters...

Page 725: ...y alert Assign crisis alert buttons only to attendant consoles and stations that must be notified of an emergency call n If set to n all users are notified but only one user needs to acknowledge an al...

Page 726: ...of time between DTMF tones for each digit Displays when the Alert Pager field is y Valid entries Usage digits 0 9 dash Enter a number up to 15 digits to identify the location where the crisis alert c...

Page 727: ...a number up to 15 digits A pause about 2 seconds is for timing of the message For instance after the pin number you may want to have a pause to allow time for the pager service to set up the correct...

Page 728: ...ony Adjunct Links field is y Field descriptions for page 1 Figure 150 CTL Link screen when Type field is ASAI or ADJLK Figure 151 CTI Link screen when Type field is ASAI IP or ADJ IP add cti link next...

Page 729: ...DEFINITY G3i 1 16 S8300 Media Server Avaya Communication Manager on a DEFINITY Server R S8700 Multi Connect Valid entries Usage ADJLK For ASAI links not used by co resident DLG ADJ IP For ASAI adjunct...

Page 730: ...lay only field that appears when the Type field is ASAI or ADJLK Fixed TEI Appears when the Type field is ASAI or ADJLK It indicates that the endpoint has a fixed Terminal Endpoint Identifier TEI The...

Page 731: ...ll be sent is based on association precedence as follows active notification if enabled call control if enabled or domain control if enabled Use the Station screen to change this option The new option...

Page 732: ...ptions in this book Field descriptions for page 1 Figure 153 Data Module Baud Rate Used with X 25 Data Modules The maximum raw data transmission speed Valid entries Usage 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200...

Page 733: ...o determine compatibility when non ISDN PRI facilities are connected to ISDN facilities ISDN PRI Interworking Board Used with Announcement Data Modules Enter the five character announcement circuit pa...

Page 734: ...gned to the data module Destination Number Used with X 25 and Processor Interface data modules See Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya Communication Manager for more information DTE DCE...

Page 735: ...5 Data Modules Establish Connection Used with X 25 Point to Point and Processor Interface used with DEFINITY CSI and SI only data modules See Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya Communic...

Page 736: ...lex This field appears only after you set the Multimedia field to y This field is left blank until you enter the data module extension in MM Complex Data Ext on the Station screen Valid entries Usage...

Page 737: ...tivity for Avaya Communication Manager for more information PDATA Port Used with System Port Data Modules Enter a seven digit alphanumeric port location to which the data module is connected Used to r...

Page 738: ...rocessor Interface Data Modules enter the 2 digit circuit number of the Processor Interface port A multi carrier cabinet system supports the use of two Processor Interface circuit packs the first circ...

Page 739: ...Carrier A through E 4 5 Slot Number 0 through 20 6 7 Circuit Number 01 through 04 x 25 circuit pack 01 through 31 DEFINITY SI S8700 IP Connect tdm pdm configurations 01 through 16 ppp for S8700 IP Co...

Page 740: ...ith Point to Point data modules for S8700 IP Connect See Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya Communication Manager for more information Switched Virtual Circuit A display only field used...

Page 741: ...dministered Netcon Data Module in DEFINITY SI configurations allows the system to save and restore the recorded announcements file between the announcement circuit pack and the system memory data line...

Page 742: ...MTDM The MPDM 7400B or 8400B Data Module provides a Data Communications Equipment DCE interface for connection to equipment such as data terminals CDR output devices on premises administration termina...

Page 743: ...hieved at the same time Connections for these interfaces are achieved via a digital line port and MPDM combination and or in the case of DCS or ISDN PRI via a DS1 interface One direct EIA connection i...

Page 744: ...ore information Node Name Appears when the Type field is ppp Used with Point to Point data modules See Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya Communication Manager for more information ABBR...

Page 745: ...ALING Abbreviated Dialing Dial Code Used with 7500 Data Line Netcon Processor Trunk Processor Interface and World Class BRI Data Modules Only appears when the Special Dialing Option field is default W...

Page 746: ...a modules 7500 and ADM For Avaya ISDN BRI or World Class ISDN BRI data modules use the default settings Default Duplex Used with 7500 and World Class BRI Data Modules Used to identify the duplex mode...

Page 747: ...information on fields on the route pattern screen on page 1544 for additional information Default ITC Used with 7500 and World Class BRI Data Modules MM Complex Voice Ext Used with 7500 and World Cla...

Page 748: ...re members of a hunt group and to allow busy out when DTE turns power off so that calls do not terminate on that DTE change data module 30 DATA MODULE Page 2 of 2 CAPABILITIES KYBD Dialing y Configura...

Page 749: ...dial prompt This option normally is enabled for originate receive DTE that has a need to set up data calls If this option is disabled originations cannot be done at the DTE and text feedback does not...

Page 750: ...0 2400 4800 9600 or 19200 Enter y beside the desired operating speed Enter n if the speed is not desired The DLC can be any one of these speeds The speed is matched for the duration of the call from c...

Page 751: ...computer or an intelligent device OPTIONS Answer Text Appears when the KYBD Dialing field is y This option enables text feedback that is normally delivered to the DTE when a call is answered or disco...

Page 752: ...ect Parity Appears when the KYBD Dialing field is y Select the desired type of parity The DLC generates the parities when call setup text is sent to the DTE The DLC does not check the parity when rece...

Page 753: ...ate than that of its far end connection but transmitting relatively low amounts of data for example a user typing at a terminal Also this option may be selected whether Keyboard Dialing is selected NO...

Page 754: ...non intelligent terminals Table 12 DLDM screen settings for printer connection Field on screen Option Comments Speed Highest speed at which the Printer operates Subject to distance limitations Autoad...

Page 755: ...as DTE Dial Echoing yes Only if the KYBD Dialing field is y Disconnect Sequence 2 Depends on terminal Answer Text yes Connected Indication Don t care Configuration yes Table 14 DLDM screen settings fo...

Page 756: ...version of page 2 does not appears for S8700 IP Connect Figure 156 X 25 Adjunct Data Module Table 15 DLDM screen settings for terminating connection to host computer Field on screen Option Comments Sp...

Page 757: ...ng or the end of the transmission of a frame At the end of this timer retransmission of a frame is initiated according to the procedures for link set up and disconnection or information transfer Retry...

Page 758: ...nated when the reset request is received or confirmed Restart T20 Timer seconds The T20 timer is a DTE time limit started when DTE issues a restart indication and terminated when the restart request i...

Page 759: ...digits For example if the SPID field is 1234 and the Endpt ID field is set to 01 then the SPID administered on the terminal is 000123401 The three leading zeros are necessary to create a 9 digit SPID...

Page 760: ...initialization capability SPID support and other Maintenance Management capability SPID Used with 7500 and World Class BRI Data Modules Appears only if the Endpt Init field is y The Service Profile I...

Page 761: ...ing Avaya Communication Manager You should update the date and time for a leap year or a system restart after a power failure The correct date and time assure that CDR records are correct CDR does not...

Page 762: ...nt day of the month The system clock uses this as the current date Valid entries Usage Sunday through Saturday Enter the current day of the week The system clock uses this as the current day Valid ent...

Page 763: ...time use the Daylight Saving Rule screen See Establishing Daylight Savings Rules on page 37 for instructions on how to set up daylight savings rules Valid entries Usage January through December Enter...

Page 764: ...he week you want the clock to move back to return to standard time If you enter Day in this field the clock will change on the exact date entered in the next two fields change daylight savings rules P...

Page 765: ...he date you want the clock to move back to return to standard time Valid entries Usage 0 to 23 Enter the number of hours you want the clock to move ahead for daylight savings and to move back to retur...

Page 766: ...e appropriate machine ID index to find the QSIG subscriber entry in the QSIG MWI Prefix screen It also assigns the voice mail number to be used when a DCS served user node interrogates a QSIG message...

Page 767: ...1 DCS TO QSIG TSC GATEWAY AAR AAR ARS ARS Mach Sig TSC Voice Mail Access Mach Sig TSC VoiceMail Access ID Grp Index Number Code ID Grp Index Number Code __ __ ___ ____________ _____ ___ ___ ____ ____...

Page 768: ...10 Enter the assigned signaling group number between 1 and 110 for DEFINITY SI and CSI 1 through 416 Enter the assigned signaling group number between 1 and 416 for DEFINITY R 1 through 650 Enter the...

Page 769: ...call that Avaya Communication Manager needs to interpret The Dial Plan Analysis Table and the Dial Plan Parameters screen work together to define your system s dial plan Figure 161 Dial Plan Analysis...

Page 770: ...ivate network In order to use this code in your dial plan the ARS AAR Dialing without FAC feature must be enabled on the System Parameters Customer Options screen Contact your Avaya representative to...

Page 771: ...station numbering extensions of various lengths all with the same first digit are mapped on the Dial Plan Analysis table The system then employs an inter digit time out to ensure that all dialed digi...

Page 772: ...and Enter any combination of 1 to 4 digits the following restrictions apply The digits and may only be used as first digits and only for the Call Types fac and dac For Call Type attd if the Total Len...

Page 773: ...tain all x characters no punctuation or you can use a combination of 6 x characters and 0 2 hyphens spaces or periods to depict how 6 digit extensions will display There must be 6 x characters and no...

Page 774: ...and valid In addition the longest extension length on the Dial Plan Analysis screen plus the length of the ARS AAR Internal Call Prefix must equal or be greater than the ARS AAR Internal Call Total L...

Page 775: ...lists The screen may be required for each CO and FX trunk group connected to a step by step CO Each outgoing digit string from the server running Communication Manager to the step by step CO is treate...

Page 776: ...umber A display only field indicating the Digit Absorption List number 0 through 4 The list number is referenced from a field entry on the associated trunk group Valid entries Usage A through F change...

Page 777: ...k The client name on the CTI server side identifies the logical connection on the client side IP address and host name for multiple links and for the corresponding client CTI link number client name t...

Page 778: ...fuse connections for that Client Name Client Link pair add ds1 xxxxxx Page 1 of 2 DS1 CIRCUIT PACK Location _____ Name _______________ Bit Rate _____ Line Coding ____ Line Compensation _ Framing Mode...

Page 779: ...Protocol ________ Country Protocol ____ Protocol Version _ Interface Companding _____ CRC _ Idle Code ________ DCP Analog Bearer Capability ________ MMI Cabling Board _____ MMI Interface ESM MAINTENAN...

Page 780: ...d you can t change the Bit Rate field with a change ds1 command Instead execute a remove ds1 command Then use the add ds1 command to administer the circuit pack again You ll have to re enter all the i...

Page 781: ...dn pri Valid entries Usage timeslot sequential If Avaya Communication Manager is connected via QSIG trunks to a switch server supporting the ETSI QSIG or ISO QSIG specifications this field must be seq...

Page 782: ...an E 1 facility You cannot submit the screen if this field is blank Using the change ds1 command you can change this field if the D channel is not used in a signaling group This field appears only wh...

Page 783: ...re using E 1 service Avaya Communication Manager automatically selects CEPT1 framing Tip Avaya recommends using ESF when your service provider supports it especially if you may someday upgrade the fac...

Page 784: ...st be administered as user Valid entries Usage any 8 digit string of 0 s and 1 s This entry sets the signal sent out over idle DS0 channels The string must be compatible with the protocol used by the...

Page 785: ...lid entries Usage alaw Enter alaw for E 1 service mulaw Enter mulaw for T 1 service Valid entries Usage PROGress Normally select this value PROGress asks the public network to cut through the B channe...

Page 786: ...dpoint PRI Endpoint Signaling Group and Trunk Group NOTE When the DS1 circuit pack is used for ISDN service the ISDN D channel data is inverted when ami basic or ami zcs is entered and not inverted wh...

Page 787: ...k was first administered MMI Cabling Board This field appears only if the MMCH field is y on the System Parameters Customer Options screen MMI Interface This display only field appears if the MMCH fie...

Page 788: ...field selects the protocol that matches your network service provider s protocol See Public network signaling administration for ISDN PRI Layer 3 on page 789 to see which countries support which prot...

Page 789: ...ustralia TPH 1856 National ISDN protocol Restart 2 b Australia ETSI ISDN protocol Restart 3 Japan NTT INS NET Restart 4 Italy ETS 300 102 Restart 5 Netherlands ETS 300 102 Restart 6 Singapore ETS 300...

Page 790: ...he Country Protocol field s entry 16 Argentina ETS 300 102 Restart 17 Greece ETS 300 102 Restart 18 China ETS 300 102 Restart 19 Hong Kong ETS 300 102 Restart 20 Thailand ETS 300 102 Restart 21 Macedo...

Page 791: ...nel Associated Signaling the Country Protocol field is 21 and the Interconnect field is co or pbx Valid entries Usage 20 to 1000 ms in increments of 10ms Work with your network services provider to de...

Page 792: ...s the b side this field should be set to a regardless of whether the layer 2 designation is peer master or peer slave and vice versa 15 Russia CIS NA NA NA 16 Argentina 10 180 1 17 Greece 100 180 1 18...

Page 793: ...r voice or data transmission Channel 0 is used for framing while channel 16 carries signaling robbed bit Enter robbed bit for in band signaling with T 1 service This setting yields 24 56 kbps B channe...

Page 794: ...cho cancellation configurations are available Enter 1 5 15 provides the most rapid adaptation in detecting and correcting echo at the beginning of a call NOTE Plan 1 introduces 6 db of loss for additi...

Page 795: ...the CSU is an external unit No options are available on page 2 for administering an external CSU integrated Enter integrated if a 120A CSU module is attached to the DS1 board This integrated channel s...

Page 796: ...or your network service provider Page 2 does not appear for all DS1 circuit packs For those circuit packs that support it this page appears only when the Framing Mode field is esf or the Near end CSU...

Page 797: ...ONS Receive ALBO Receive Automatic Line Build Out This field increases the strength of incoming signals by a fixed amount to compensate for line losses Valid entries Usage a Enter b This field adminis...

Page 798: ...equipment to the network is lost CPE LOOPBACK JACK OPTIONS Supply CPE Loopback Jack Power If a CPE Customer Premise Equipment Loopback Jack is installed the DS1 board should supply power to the equip...

Page 799: ...ded Group Number This display only field shows the number associated with a collection of pickup groups The extended group is a collection of pickup groups that can answer calls from other pickup grou...

Page 800: ...s code FAC to pick up calls in their extended pickup group Extensions Administered to have an MCT Control Button This screen lists the extensions that can take control of a Malicious Call Trace MCT re...

Page 801: ...57 ________ 75 ________ 93 ________ 4 ________ 22 ________ 40 ________ 58 ________ 76 ________ 94 ________ 5 ________ 23 ________ 41 ________ 59 ________ 77 ________ 95 ________ 6 ________ 24 ________...

Page 802: ...ccess codes Page 1 of 7 FEATURE ACCESS CODE FAC Abbreviated Dialing List1 Access Code ____ Abbreviated Dialing List2 Access Code ____ Abbreviated Dialing List3 Access Code ____ Abbreviated Dial Prgm G...

Page 803: ...from 0 9 and contain 1 or 2 digits Auto Alternate Routing AAR Access Code Used to access AAR Auto Route Selection ARS Access Code1 Used to access ARS You can have one ARS access code for local and on...

Page 804: ...d prior to entering an account code for CDR purposes Change COR Access Code Used to allow users to change their class of restriction COR from a phone This field can only be used if the Change COR by F...

Page 805: ...ctivate call forwarding from a telephone or remote location change feature access codes Page 2 of 7 FEATURE ACCESS CODE FAC Emergency Access to Attendant Access Code Enhanced EC500 Activation Deactiva...

Page 806: ...Extended Group Call Pickup Access Code to complete the operation Facility Test Calls Access Code Used to place activate a facility test call SECURITY ALERT To ensure the security of your system leave...

Page 807: ...l Unlock Used to unlock a telephone s display module The lock function is canceled at the telephone by dialing this unlock FAC followed by the SCC Leave Word Calling Send A Message Used to send a leav...

Page 808: ...if the Posted Messages field is set to y on the System Parameters Customer Options screen Used to access the Posted Messages feature Field descriptions for page 3 Figure 174 Feature Access Code FAC sc...

Page 809: ...n Deactivation Used to activate or deactivate sending all calls to coverage with minimal or no alerting at the station Station Firmware Download Access Code This field specifies the feature access cod...

Page 810: ...there is still a port assigned type X in the Port field then try the TTI merge again Terminal Translation Initialization Separation Code Enter the digits that must be dialed to remove separate a stati...

Page 811: ...Enter the digits an agent must dial to be able to add a skill to their current skill set change feature access codes Page 4 of 7 FEATURE ACCESS CODE FAC Whisper Page Activation Access Code change feat...

Page 812: ...the digits being returned to the system This FAC must match the code administered on CONVERSANT Login Access Code Enter the code the agent must dial to gain access to the ACD functions This is a syst...

Page 813: ...scriptions for page 6 The feature access codes on this page pertain only to Hospitality features Figure 177 Feature Access Code FAC screen Automatic Wakeup Call Access Code Enter the access code the u...

Page 814: ...o verify a wakeup announcement Voice Do Not Disturb Access Code Enter the access code the user must dial to enter or cancel a do not disturb request without using a display through the use of voice pr...

Page 815: ...enter this FAC from the phone that enabled data collaboration on a multimedia mode call it will deactivate the data session and revert to a voice and video call If a user enters this FAC while partic...

Page 816: ...e or DID trunk call that is to be routed via AAR ARS change system parameters features page 1 FEATURE RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS Self Station Display Enabled n Trunk to Trunk Transfer none Automatic Ca...

Page 817: ...ist is to be programmed Valid entries Usage local Local referral calls generate on and for the local switch primary Primary referral calls generate on the local switch for remote servers switches as w...

Page 818: ...wing ACA related fields Call Park Timeout Interval minutes Valid entries Usage An unassigned extension Do not use the same extension number for both fields The specified extensions are assigned automa...

Page 819: ...ent NOTE If entering a Multi Location Dial Plan shortened extension see the Caution note on page 632 attd For system security Avaya recommends entering attd in this field This routes intercept calls t...

Page 820: ...o allow all transferred trunk calls to receive music until the call is answered if the Music on Hold feature is available no Enter no if trunk callers are to hear music or silence if Music on Hold is...

Page 821: ...1 through 64 S8700 IP Connect S8700 Multi Connect S8300 Media Server First and second characters are the cabinet number A through E Third character is the carrier 0 through 20 Fourth and fifth charac...

Page 822: ...receiving an incoming call In the case of the inspect button the display continues until the user presses the normal or exit button or until a display altering event occurs Trunk to Trunk Transfer Reg...

Page 823: ...Calls n Stations with System wide Retrieval Permission enter extension 1 34430 3 attd 5 7 9 2 34412 4 6 8 10 WARNING SEE USER DOCUMENTATION BEFORE CHANGING TTI STATE Terminal Translation Initializatio...

Page 824: ...e protocols on their respective administration screens Customer Telephone Activation CTA Enabled Valid entries Usage y The message waiting indication for a particular station is on whenever an externa...

Page 825: ...h Data Privacy Record All Submission Failures in History Log Allows submission failures to be recorded on the history log Valid entries Usage 2x56 Sets default parameter for bandwidth and bearer for a...

Page 826: ...nsion must be removed from this list before the station is removed from the system The server running Communication Manager refers to the extensions on this list as super retrievers Valid entries Usag...

Page 827: ...generated for unadministered digital ports This field appears when Terminal Translation Initialization TTI Enabled is y Valid entries Usage y n Enter y to start ACTR TTI and PSA transactions extension...

Page 828: ...f Hook Alert 10__ Emergency Access Redirection Extension ________ Number of Emergency Calls Allowed in Attendant Queue __ Call Pickup Alerting n Temporary Bridged Appearance on Call Pickup y Call Pick...

Page 829: ...kup an intercom call Valid entries Usage announcement Provides a recorded announcement to calls that cannot be completed as dialed You select and record the message The calling party receives indicati...

Page 830: ...ephone in the field attendant Intercepted calls are redirected to the attendant extension may not be a VDN extension If extension is entered an associated extension number field displays Enter the ext...

Page 831: ...er y to allow use of the Directed Call Pickup feature across the system n Enter n to prevent feature use Valid entries Usage An assigned extension Enter the assigned extension number can be a VDN wher...

Page 832: ...mber of calls that can go in to the emergency queue Valid entries Usage y Enter y to allow a temporary bridged appearance for calls answered with the Call Pickup or Directed Call Pickup features This...

Page 833: ...URITY ALERT You enhance your system s security by using the maximum length for your authorization code Authorization Codes Enabled This field cannot be administered if Authorization Codes is not enabl...

Page 834: ...sage announcement A sub field appears to the right if announcement is used If the entry is announcement enter the assigned announcement extension attendant Intercepted calls are redirected to the atte...

Page 835: ...NTER PARAMETERS System Printer Endpoint ____ Lines Per Page 60 EIA Device Bit Rate 9600 Emergency Extension Forwarding min 10 SYSTEM WIDE PARAMETERS Switch Name ________________ Emergency Numbers Inte...

Page 836: ...ve several PBXs in a campus should assign emergency location extensions accordingly This field sets the Emergency Extension Forwarding timer for all incoming trunk calls if an emergency call gets cut...

Page 837: ...roup or ACD number Emergency Numbers External Enter the external phone number you want to use for emergency calls No License Incoming Call Number Enter the administered extension that can receive inco...

Page 838: ...voice recorders SEND ALL CALLS OPTIONS Auto Inspect on Send All Calls Valid entries Usage y n Enter y to provide an audible tone to the controlling station when an MCT recorder is actively recording...

Page 839: ...to that station s own extension to be sent immediately to Coverage or causes calls to different extensions assigned to the station as bridged appearances to become Ring Ping notification if Redirect...

Page 840: ...system operates in Bridged Mode change system parameters features page 5 FEATURE RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS Public Network Trunks on Conference Call 5 Auto Start n Conference Parties with Public Netwo...

Page 841: ...tart If this field is enabled the Start buttons on all attendant consoles are disabled Valid entries Usage y n Enter y to allow calls for DID and DIOD type trunk groups to complete calls using ARS or...

Page 842: ...ng no public network trunks Conference Tone NOTE Bridging and Conference Tones are not supported by all countries If these tones are enabled for countries other than Italy Belgium United Kingdom or Au...

Page 843: ...ster the system to remind a user that a call has been on hold for too long Valid entries Usage y n Enter y to apply an intrusion tone executive override when an attendant intrudes on the call Valid en...

Page 844: ...must not have Disconnect Supervision for this timer to apply Public Network Trunks on Conference Call Indicates the number of public network trunks allowed on a conference call Reset Shift Timer secon...

Page 845: ...econds Enter number or blank to limit how long a DID call can remain unanswered before routing to the DID TIE ISDN Intercept Treatment feature This timer interacts with the nonadministrable 50 second...

Page 846: ...the Customer Options System Parameters screen is y Valid entries Usage n Default The Outgoing Trunk Disconnect Timer to be set based on the COR of the originating station y Enter y to enable the Outg...

Page 847: ...ging up completes the transfer Requires DCP Hybrid IP ISDN BRI or wireless phones change system parameters features page 6 FEATURE RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS CONFERENCE TRANSFER Abort Transfer n No Dia...

Page 848: ...reless or ISDN BRI phone users to complete a transfer operation by hanging up Unhold Allows the user to press the hold button on a phone to release a hold if no other line appearance is on hold or ale...

Page 849: ...ONE STEP RECORDNG On stations administered with this feature button this allows users to activate and deactivate the recording of active calls to their Audix with the press of one button Apply Ready I...

Page 850: ...disables the tone The default value is a 15 second interval change system parameters features page 7 FEATURE RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS ISDN PARAMETERS Send Non ISDN Trunk Group Names as Connected Name...

Page 851: ...OA and NPI criteria The prefix plus the calling connected number digit string is limited to 15 digits with truncation occurring at the least significant digits Maximum Length Appears only if the Unkno...

Page 852: ...National CPN Prefix Allows you to apply prefixes to national calling numbers for display at receiving phones This is useful for those phones that use or implement call back features based on incoming...

Page 853: ...tries Usage y n Enter y to pass CPN information to ASAI Valid entries Usage y n Enter y to allow Path Replacement after queue vector processing has started Depending on the version of CMS you are usin...

Page 854: ...ITY AUDIX field on the Hunt Group screen must be y for this field to have an effect Valid entries Usage y n Enter y to provide appropriate display information for example for the Posted Messages featu...

Page 855: ...as a 5ESS it must be a generic 5EXX or later Failure to validate the central office capability may cause the central office to drop outgoing calls from your media server In this case change the value...

Page 856: ...aracters Enter a text string to replace the unavailable numbers on the display Valid entries Usage 1 3 digits or blank Enter a valid country code for this node The default is blank no SBS signaling tr...

Page 857: ...charge information To see charge information for a call the user must have a disp chrg button and must press the button before the call drops change system parameters features page 9 FEATURE RELATED...

Page 858: ...e users hear double zip tone following the announcement All other telephone users hear single zip tone NOTE This field does not effect auto answer zip tone heard prior to the VOA Intercept Treatment o...

Page 859: ...of the levels of tone detection If Avaya Communication Manager detects any tone at all it interprets this as dial tone medium The server running Avaya Communication Manager interprets any tone which...

Page 860: ...Regardless an on hook lasting 50 to 150 ms coming from a 2500 type set will always be treated as a digit pulse unless Ignore Rotary Digits is y for that station Outpulse Without Tone Pull Transfer Rep...

Page 861: ...ng tone be provided to the called party for all types of call waiting access Valid entries Usage busy intercept silence When a station is the last party remaining off hook on a call that station recei...

Page 862: ...r determines when the trunk will be disconnected if the Disconnect Supervision In or Disconnect Supervision Out fields on the Trunk Group screen are n blank Enter blank if you do not want Avaya Commun...

Page 863: ...TEM PARAMETERS CALL CENTER SYSTEM PARAMETERS EAS Expert Agent Selection EAS Enabled n Minimum Agent LoginID Password Length Direct Agent Announcement Extension ________ Delay ___ Message Waiting Lamp...

Page 864: ...S Agent s LoginID password Only appears if Expert Agent Selection EAS on the System Parameters Customer Options screen is y VECTORING Available Agent Adjustments for BSR Controls the use of BSR availa...

Page 865: ...the CONVERSANT are a 100 msec tone and 70 msec pause Interflow qpos EWT Threshold Displays only if on the System Parameters Customer Options screen the Lookahead Interflow LAI field is y Part of enhan...

Page 866: ...ously entered by the caller for the current collect vector step SERVICE OBSERVING or Conference Tone Service Observing Basic on the System Parameters Customer Options screen must be y before this fiel...

Page 867: ...les and regulations before using these features ASAI Call Classification After Answer Supervision For use with ASAI Outbound Call Management OCM Send UCID to ASAI Valid entries Usage y n Enter y to as...

Page 868: ...upervisor Call Selection Override y Auto Reserve Agents Copy ASAI UUI During Conference Transfer REASON CODES Aux Work Reason Code Type none Logout Reason Code Type none CALL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM Adjunct...

Page 869: ...visor exceeds its Level 1 threshold For information on CentreVu Advocate please contact your Avaya Account Executive or see the Avaya Business Advocate Release 3 Version 11 User Guide Valid entries Us...

Page 870: ...AUX mode but do not want to force the agent to do so To enter requested the Reason Codes and EAS on the System Parameters Customer Options screen must be y forced Enter forced to force an agent to ent...

Page 871: ...seconds before calls are considered abandoned Calls with talk time that is less than this number and that are not held are tracked by BCMS and displayed by VuStats as ABAND calls Valid entries Usage R...

Page 872: ...r an agent when the agent logs in at midnight Enter at midnight to clear shift data for all agents at midnight Valid entries Usage y Agents are removed from reports when they have no staff time during...

Page 873: ...es page 12 FEATURE RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS AUTOMATIC EXCLUSION PARAMETERS Automatic Exclusion by COS y Automatic Exclusion Coverage Hold y Automatic Exclusion with Whisper Page y Recall Rotary Digit...

Page 874: ...he call by pressing the appropriate bridged appearance button And if the coverage point places the exclusion call on hold the principal can retrieve the call n If a coverage point has answered a call...

Page 875: ...pack containing the radio controllers with download server permission IP PARAMETERS Direct IP IP Audio Connections Allows direct audio connections between IP endpoints Valid entries Usage 0 through 9...

Page 876: ...ussian MFP information over another trunk port if Communication Manager does not receive a timely response for the information T2 Backward Signal Activation Timer secs The T2 Backward Signal Activatio...

Page 877: ...0 to 95 Enter a class of restriction In order to page the group users class of restriction must give them calling permission for the group s class of restriction Valid entries Usage An extension numbe...

Page 878: ...a Communication Manager fills in this display field with the name assigned to each extension on the Station screen Related topics See Paging Over Speakerphones on page 406 for complete instructions Se...

Page 879: ...ay End Hour Valid entries Usage Up to 27 characters Enter a phrase to describe the holiday Valid entries Usage 1 31 Enter the ending day of the holiday Valid entries Usage 0 23 Enter the ending hour o...

Page 880: ...e number Start Day Start Hour Valid entries Usage 0 59 Enter the ending minute of the holiday Valid entries Usage 1 12 Enter the ending month of the holiday Valid entries Usage Up to 27 characters Ent...

Page 881: ...es Usage 1 12 Enter the starting month of the holiday change system parameters hospitality Page 1 of 3 HOSPITALITY Message Waiting Configuration act nopms Controlled Restrictions Configuration act nop...

Page 882: ...age to INTUITY Lodging This field is used only in ASCII mode Valid entries Usage act nopms The message is acknowledged MESSAGE ACK but no action is taken act pms If active act pms the server and PMS e...

Page 883: ...and accept housekeeper information Valid entries Usage Valid data extension number Cannot be a VDN extension This extension can be the same as the PMS Log printer and both sets of reports can be print...

Page 884: ...es Usage Valid data extension Cannot be a VDN extension This extension is dialed by the server to send housekeeping and PMS events to the printer PMS_LOG Use this value if the printer is connected ove...

Page 885: ...or sends an inquiry for acknowledgment from the PMS before giving up on the message Valid entries Usage Valid extension Enter the data extension number the server dials to access PMS Cannot be a VDN...

Page 886: ...fifth character are the slot number 01 through 04 Analog TIE trunks 01 through 31 Six and seventh characters are the circuit number change system parameters hospitality Page 2 of 3 HOSPITALITY Dual Wa...

Page 887: ...ted is used complete the Integrated Announcement Extension field The extension you enter must be a valid integrated announcement extension administered on the Recorded Announcements screen or a VDN If...

Page 888: ...haracters Valid entries Usage y n Enter y to use the Automatic Selection of DID Numbers for Guest Rooms feature Valid entries Usage 01 through 44 DEFINITY R or 01 through 03 DEFINITY CSI SI or 1 throu...

Page 889: ...leading digit of the extension number is dropped to screen the room number In order to accommodate PMS devices that are based on room number and not extension this leading digit may be deleted on mes...

Page 890: ...dication of failed wakeup calls Integrated Announcement Extension This field appears only when the Announcement Type field is integrated This indicates the wakeup announcement extension when using the...

Page 891: ...the server will not support an extension that starts with 0 Number of Digits in PMS Coverage Path This indicates whether the coverage paths are 3 or 4 digits long There can be up to 9999 coverage path...

Page 892: ...of Scheduled Emergency Access Summary Report This indicates the time of day that the Emergency Access Summary Report will be printed on the Journal Schedule printer Time of Scheduled Wakeup Activity R...

Page 893: ...scriptions for page 3 Figure 195 Hospitality screen Valid entries Usage hh mm am pm Enter the time where hh hour mm minute am pm A M or P M Valid entries Usage y n Enter y if each extension can reques...

Page 894: ...s and choose the screens that can be used to implement your hunt group requirements The total number of pages vary depending on your System configuration See the Hardware Guide for Avaya Communication...

Page 895: ...Group Name ____________________________ Queue y Group Extension ________ Vector Group Type Coverage Path ____ TN Night Service Destination ____ COR MM Early Answer Security Code ____ ISDN Caller Disp...

Page 896: ..._ Queue y Group Extension ____ Vector y Group Type TN COR MM Early Answer Security Code ____ ISDN Caller Display ________ Queue Length ___ Calls Warning Threshold ___ Port x Extension ____ Time Warnin...

Page 897: ...ion can be used by the Terminal Translation Initialization TTI feature to assign a port to this extension from the port itself Once Calls Warning Port is assigned a valid port either via TTI or the ch...

Page 898: ...he desired restriction for the hunt group If this is a hunt group supporting the AUDIX in a DCS feature the CORs on the Hunt Group screen on each server running Communication Manager must be the same...

Page 899: ...our System Parameters Customer Options screen for Automatic Call Distribution ACD Expert Agent Selection EAS and CentreVu Advocate The table below shows what group types are available depending on you...

Page 900: ...lable Communication Manager routes the call to the most idle agent based on when the agent finished the most recent call ead mia or the least occupied agent based on agent occupancy ead loa This allow...

Page 901: ...ue at the same time This field must have an entry when the Queue field is y Security Code Enter a security code password used for the Demand Print feature Valid entries Usage y n The system begins to...

Page 902: ...ed unassigned Time Warning Port Appears if the Queue field is y Enter the seven character port number assigned to the Auxiliary Queue Time Warning lamp that flashes when the time entered in Time Warni...

Page 903: ...screen the Timed ACW field on page 3 is y Figure 200 Hunt Group screen when ACD is y and Queue and Vector are n Valid entries Usage 1 through 100 Valid entries Usage y n Enter y to indicate that this...

Page 904: ...ld is y and the Controlling Adjunct field is asai or adjlk Enter the appropriate ASAI CTI Link This field cannot be blank Valid entries Usage y n Enter y if this hunt group is to serve as an Auto Avai...

Page 905: ...Feature Related System Parameters screen Valid entries Usage none Indicates that members of the split skill or hunt group are not controlled by an adjunct processor asai All agent logins are controll...

Page 906: ...hat a call can remain in the queue before no more calls will be accepted by the queue If 0 is entered a call is redirected to this split skill only if there is an available agent Level 1 Threshold sec...

Page 907: ...ilities and if so what type Valid entries Usage internal If you enter internal in this field and on the System Parameters Customer Options screen neither the VuStats or BCMS field is y the system disp...

Page 908: ...field is blank Direct Agent calls go to the agent s coverage path if it is administered If not the calls go to a VDN one forced An ACD call is delivered automatically to an idle line appearance if th...

Page 909: ...s y on the System Parameters Customer Options screen Service Objective Appears when the Skill and Business Advocate fields on the Feature Related System Parameters screen are y and on the Hunt Group s...

Page 910: ...ve An objective is a split or skill goal for the call This could be an agent objective such as a specific number of calls handled or an average talk time The objective could also be a percent within t...

Page 911: ...sociated first announcement is given the calling party The call retains its place in the queue while the caller is listening to the recorded announcement If the call hasn t been answered after the ann...

Page 912: ...s after being in the queue for the time interval specified in First Announcement Delay If the call hasn t been answered after the announcement the caller hears music only after the first announcement...

Page 913: ...8700 IP Connect S8700 Multi Connect if the Message Center field is msa Primary Appears on Avaya DEFINITY Server R S8300 Media Server S8700 IP Connect S8700 Multi Connect if the Message Center field is...

Page 914: ...ng Appears only when the ACD and Queue fields both are y and the Vector field is n Voice Mail Extension Appears if the Message Center field is rem vm Valid entries Usage Enter the extension number ass...

Page 915: ...announcement the caller receives after being in the queue for the time interval specified in First Announcement Delay If the call hasn t been answered after the announcement the caller hears music onl...

Page 916: ...as many as 6 as qsig mwi Valid entries Usage 0 through 99 When 0 is entered the first announcement is provided immediately to the caller This value is set automatically to 0 if there is no queue blank...

Page 917: ...he second announcement is repeated Second Announcement Extension Appears only when the ACD and Queue fields both are y and the Vector field is n NOTE If entering a Multi Location Dial Plan shortened e...

Page 918: ...he public network number of the AUDIX hunt group on the Message Center server Field descriptions for pages 4 through X Figure 204 Hunt Group Members screen NOTE Only Pages 1 2 and 3 appear if the hunt...

Page 919: ...extension of the hunt group Group Number This display only field shows the number of a hunt group Group Type This display only field shows the type of the hunt group Member Range Allowed The range of...

Page 920: ...bove extension number when it is administered in the System Intercom Group This screen assigns extensions to intercom groups Figure 205 Intercom Group Valid entries Usage Enter the assigned extension...

Page 921: ...er running Communication Manager fills in this field with the name from the Station screen Related topics See See Whisper paging on page 1760 for detailed information on whisper paging on page 409 for...

Page 922: ...duplicate access numbers are allowed in the table Valid entries Usage 0 to 15 characters Description to identify the IXC change ixc codes Page 1 of 2 INTER EXCHANGE CARRIER CODES IXC Codes Assignments...

Page 923: ...r page 2 Figure 207 Inter Exchange Carrier Codes screen IXC Code Format IXC Prefix Valid entries Usage 1 to 4 digit code format x X xxxx For line 1 xxx For line 2 Valid entries Usage 1 to 3 digit pref...

Page 924: ...h CDR beginning with the extension specified by extension For example if you enter list intra switch cdr 81000 count 500 the system displays extension 81000 if it is administered for Intra Switch CDR...

Page 925: ...change ip network map Page 1 of X IP ADDRESS MAPPING Emergency Subnet 802 1Q Location FROM IP Address TO IP Address or Mask Region VLAN Extension 1 __2 __3 __0 1 __2 __3 255 24 __1 ___3 ________ 1 __2...

Page 926: ...e mask is applied to the From IP Address field placing zeros in the non masked rightmost bits This becomes the stored From address The mask is applied to the To IP Address field placing 1 s in the non...

Page 927: ...n extension type included in the dial plan but does not have to be an extension on the local system It can be a UDP extension The entry defaults to blank A blank entry typically would be used for an I...

Page 928: ...and their flavors if the G711MU does not meet your desired voice quality bandwidth trade off specification For example if a far end server is not running Avaya Communication Manager you may need to c...

Page 929: ...et from the menu of options Frames Per Pkt Specify the number of frames per packet up to a packet size of 60 milliseconds ms Valid entries Usage G 711A a law G 711MU mu law G 723 5 3 G 723 6 3 G 729 G...

Page 930: ...size in milliseconds Silence Suppression Enables RTP level silence suppression on the audio stream Valid entries Usage aes Advanced Encryption Standard AES a standard cryptographic algorithm for use b...

Page 931: ...slot number six and seventh characters are the circuit number Code Sfx These fields identify the circuit pack code number for each interface list ip interface Page 1 of 4 IP INTERFACES Num Skts Net O...

Page 932: ...ommand option is used Shows the threshold number of sockets in use for IP endpoint registration on the specified C LAN before a warning message is logged Net Rgn Shows the network region number for ea...

Page 933: ...specified in the command line Valid entries Usage 01 through 44 DEFINITY R or 01 through 03 DEFINITY CSI SI or 1 through 64 S8700 IP Connect S8700 Multi Connect S8300 Media Server First and second ch...

Page 934: ...it binary number that divides the network ID and the host ID in an IP address Valid display Usage TN799 TN802 TN2302 2501AP Displays the circuit pack code number Valid entries Usage Character string u...

Page 935: ...s IP telephones and softphones This field cannot be administered for VAL boards Valid entries Usage 0 255 Enter the address of a network node that serves as the default gateway for the IP interface En...

Page 936: ...NAT shuffling for direct IP to IP audio connections is also supported Field descriptions for page 1 Figure 213 IP Network Region screen Valid entries Usage 1 499 Enter the number of sockets in use on...

Page 937: ...ative Name Description of the region Region A display only field indicating the number of the region being administered AUDIO PARAMETERS Codec Set Specifies the codec set assigned to the region Valid...

Page 938: ...er translated NAT if the IP address from which audio is to be received for direct IP to IP connections within the region is to be the one with which a NAT device replaces the native address IP phones...

Page 939: ...ya DEFINITY TDM bus Valid entries Usage 1 44 For DEFINITY R CSI SI only Enter the number for the location for the IP network region The IP endpoint uses this as its location number This applies to IP...

Page 940: ...d only appears when the Use Default Server Parameters field is set to n and the and the RTCP Enabled field is set to y Server Port This field only appears when the Use Default Server Parameters field...

Page 941: ...t every hop Use the IP TOS field to support the Audio PHB codepoint Call Control 802 1p Priority Provides Layer 2 priority for Layer 2 switches Valid entries Usage y Enter y to use the default RTCP Mo...

Page 942: ...Profile This field only appears if the RSVP Enabled field is set to y You set this field to what you have configured on your network Valid entries Usage 0 7 Specifies the Audio 802 1p priority value...

Page 943: ...which a TCP Keep Alive KA signal is sent from the endpoint Keep Alive Interval seconds Use this field to set the interval between TCP Keep Alive re transmissions When no ACK is received for all retry...

Page 944: ...rmation for the Local Spare Processor names in priority order NOTE Earlier releases of Communication Manager display a different page 2 Figure 214 LSP Names screen Field descriptions for Page 3 Each p...

Page 945: ...inter network connection Valid entries Usage 1 250 Display only Shows the source region for this inter network connection Valid entries Usage 1 250 Display only Shows the destination region for this i...

Page 946: ...not displayed This field cannot be blank if this route through two regions is being used by some non adjacent pair of regions Valid entries Usage y n The default value is y es if the codec set field...

Page 947: ...ame IP Address 1 ______________ ___ ___ ___ ___ 17 ______________ ___ ___ ___ ___ 2 ______________ ___ ___ ___ ___ 18 ______________ ___ ___ ___ ___ 3 ______________ ___ ___ ___ ___ 19 ______________...

Page 948: ...ach port on any IP device that is used for a connection See the Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya Communication Manager for more information display system parameters ip options Page 1...

Page 949: ...activation deactivation of signaling group bypass High Low Ping Test Interval sec Specifies the time between performance test pings for each testable signaling group Roundtrip Propagation Delay ms Sp...

Page 950: ...eceives RTCP packets from many devices Avaya Communication Manager pushes these values to IP phones IP softphones and VoIP media modules such that they know where to send the data The IP address is th...

Page 951: ...to access the Announcement Server Password Indicates the password to be used by the Media Gateway to access the Announcement Server Valid entries Usage in band g711 rtp payload out of band Enter the a...

Page 952: ...elecommuter mode Primary Search Time seconds While the telephone is hung up this is the maximum time period that the IP endpoint expends attempting to register with its current Communication Manager s...

Page 953: ...First and second characters are the cabinet number A through E Third character is the carrier 0 through 20 Fourth and fifth character are the slot number 01 through 04 Analog TIE trunks 01 through 31...

Page 954: ...rcuit pack or is identified as a Destination Node on another IP route If there are one or more intermediate nodes the first intermediate node is the Gateway If there are no intermediate nodes between...

Page 955: ...4 192 128 0 Enter the subnet mask associated with this IP route If you enter a value in the Network Bits field the system automatically completes this field with the corresponding Subnet Mask For exam...

Page 956: ...254 0 0 131 070 15 16 255 255 0 0 65 534 16 17 255 255 128 0 32 766 17 18 255 255 192 0 16 382 18 19 255 255 224 0 8 190 19 20 255 255 240 0 4 094 20 21 255 255 248 0 2 046 21 22 255 255 252 0 1 022 2...

Page 957: ...ssor is only available for S8100 Media Server and S8300 Media Server change ip services Page 1 of X IP SERVICES Service Enabled Local Local Remote Remote Type Node Port Node Port DLG________ y clan10...

Page 958: ...lid entries Usage 5000 to 9999 0 5111 5117 for SAT applications 5678 for ASAI For client applications this defaults to zero Valid entries Usage Node name as defined on the Node Names screen For SAT us...

Page 959: ...System Parameters Customer Options screen the Co Res DEFINITY LAN Gateway field is y Use this service type for co resident DEFINITY LAN Gateway For more information see the Avaya MultiVantage CallVis...

Page 960: ...link is still up Valid entries Usage 1 255 Determines the number of seconds to wait from the time a packet is sent until a response acknowledgement is received from the far end before trying to resen...

Page 961: ...ndem Calls screen Valid entries Usage 1 5 The Session Protocol Data Unit counter indicates the number of times Communication Manager transmits a unit of protocol data before generating an error change...

Page 962: ...party number length blank Default Indicates that all trunk groups are valid provided the Modify Tandem Calling Party field on the ISDN Trunk Group screen is set to y Valid entries Usage any combinati...

Page 963: ...d number of deleted digits up to 15 all Enter all to indicate that all digits are deleted blank Default Indicates that all trunk groups are valid provided the Modify Tandem Calling Party field on the...

Page 964: ...BRI interfaces However it is not possible to use the two types of interfaces in the same trunk groups The type of interface is chosen when the trunk members are assigned to the trunk group When ISDN P...

Page 965: ...31 ISDN PRI trunk group members respectively The TN2464 and TN2207 circuit pack can also be used with ISDN PRI The D channel for ISDN PRI interfaces switches through either the TN765 Processor Interf...

Page 966: ...s Version ISDN PRI QSIG Optional Features Feature Related System Parameters Send Non ISDN Trunk Group Name as Connected Name Display Connected Name Number for ISDN DCS Calls DS1 Circuit Pack All Signa...

Page 967: ...mber for ISDN DCS Calls System Parameters Customer Options Version ISDN BRI Trunks ISDN PRI QSIG Optional Features Maintenance Related System Parameters Packet Bus Maint Synchronization Plan All Trunk...

Page 968: ...ers Set the Send Non ISDN Trunk Group Name as Connected Name and Display Connected Name Number for ISDN DCS Calls fields ISDN BRI Trunk Circuit Pack This screen is required if using ISDN BRI trunk int...

Page 969: ...ckup is needed in which case a second DS1 is administered as a backup D channel You are not required to select a channel for a trunk group but if you do you must have already defined the trunk group a...

Page 970: ...ber was BRI and a later member was PRI or vice versa the cursor positions on the offending member and the following error message appears Cannot mix BRI and PRI ports in the same trunk group Field des...

Page 971: ...odeset for sending the information element for display The value depends on the type of server switch to which the user is connected Valid entries Usage ATM The trunk is implemented via the ATM Interf...

Page 972: ...vileges Digit Handling in out This field defines whether overlap receiving and overlap sending features are enabled Set the field to overlap when you want overlap receiving or overlap sending Set to e...

Page 973: ...riginating locally The Numbering Format field on page 2 of this screen applies to calls originated from this server running Communication Manager If this field is blank Avaya Communication Manager pas...

Page 974: ...ly if the Supplementary Service Protocol field on the System Parameters Customer Options screen is b Valid entries are y and n Blank is not a valid entry Valid entries Type of numbering TON Numbering...

Page 975: ...Long Distance Service part of ACI AT T Communications ISDN phase 2 megacom MEGACOM Service an AT T communications service that provides unbanded long distance services using special access switch to...

Page 976: ...nks integral to an ETN tie Tie trunks general purpose wats max bnd Maximum Banded Wats a WATS like offering for which a user s calls are billed at the highest WATS band subscribed to by users Valid en...

Page 977: ...efined by users on the Network Specific Facility Encoding screen Trunk Hunt Avaya Communication Manager performs a trunk hunt when searching for available channels within a facility in an ISDN trunk g...

Page 978: ...roup screen Valid entries Usage y n Enter y to allocate service provided by the trunk group Use y to enhance Network Call Redirection When you enter y the CBC Trunk Group Usage Allocation Plans screen...

Page 979: ...vice provider should be able to help you choose an appropriate value Don t change this field without the assistance of Avaya or your network service provider Valid entries Usage 31 normal unspecified...

Page 980: ...applied to the trunk group If you enter y and you set the Group Type field to isdn set the Service Type field to access dmi mos public ntwrk tandem tie or any of the craft defined services allowed in...

Page 981: ...re public unknown private and unk pvt Public indicates that the number plan according to CCITT Recommendation E 164 is used and that the Type of Number is national Unknown indicates the Numbering Plan...

Page 982: ...bers with administrable strings for incoming and outgoing calls assigned to the specified trunk group This field applies to BRI and PRI trunks SBS Appears when the Local Country Code and International...

Page 983: ...ing Number field entry for any administrable block of extensions Send Codeset 6 7 LAI IE Specifies whether the ISDN trunk should transmit information in Codeset 6 7 If the UUI IE Treatment field is sh...

Page 984: ...mentary Service Protocol field is a national supplementary service b for called busy only or d for the QSIG Global Networking Supplementary Service Protocol When the Supplementary Service Protocol fie...

Page 985: ...Customer Options screen If set to y the Wideband Support Options page appears All trunk members must be from TN464C or later circuit packs NOTE Wideband trunk calls are treated as a single trunk call...

Page 986: ...hese fields are unique to the ISDN trunk group screen ASAI User information from ASAI Valid entries are 1 to 6 1 is high and blank If blank that field s information is not forwarded Collected Digits D...

Page 987: ...Len Number CPN BN Serv _____________ ___ _______________ ___ ______________ __________ _______ _____________ ___ _______________ ___ ______________ __________ _______ _____________ ___ _______________...

Page 988: ...ed to continue the row determination If the leading digits received with the incoming call match the digits specified in the Called Number field then this row applies to the call Therefore with this t...

Page 989: ...en Specifies the number of digits received for an incoming call A blank entry is used as a wild card entry and when used means that any length of digits associated with the specified Service Feature c...

Page 990: ...r leave blank Leave blank when connected to another server switch or to a network other than the AT T Switched Network NOTE A 4 second delay occurs in terminating the call to the far end station if th...

Page 991: ...predefined Services Features that can be received on a call by call basis In addition the user defined service types can also be used The identifier other is used for all Services Features not explici...

Page 992: ...y Valid entries are 00 00 through 23 59 Allocation Plan Number Specifies the CBC Trunk Allocation Plan 1 through 3 that is in effect if a fixed usage method has been selected This field must be assign...

Page 993: ...he actual page number will vary NOTE All B channels that comprise the wideband call must reside on the same ISDN PRI facility Also all trunk members in an ISDN trunk group with the Wideband Support fi...

Page 994: ...ny set of B channels on the same facility as long as the requested bandwidth is satisfied There are no constraints such as contiguity of B channels or fixed starting points NxDS0 Enter y to specify th...

Page 995: ...s value cannot be altered without adding a DS1 interface to another signaling group If a DS1 circuit pack appears in more than one signaling group then the Sig Grp field cannot be left blank One of th...

Page 996: ...carefully Communication Manager will not check to ensure you have entered a code that supports your entry in the Network Level field You cannot enter anything in this field unless the Network Level f...

Page 997: ...Connected Number IEs Valid entries Usage 0 to 9 Enter up to 5 digits blank Because blank regional codes are valid an entry is not required if the Network Level field is 2 Valid entries Usage 0 NPI PNP...

Page 998: ...Number field is specified or the Supplementary Service Protocol field is b on the Trunk Group screen NOTE If the table is not properly administered and the Send Calling Number or Send Connected Numbe...

Page 999: ...N Prefix digits plus the extension length is less than the Total CPN Length the entry is not allowed If the Total CPN Length is 0 no calling party number information is provided to the called party an...

Page 1000: ...than the Ext Len field entry For example in the case of a 4 digit Ext Len field entry an Ext Code of 12 is the equivalent of all extensions of the screen 12xx excluding any explicitly listed longer c...

Page 1001: ...all other administered values the Protocol Version sets to a etsi QSIG When the Interface field is peer slave or peer master this field must be QSIG The choice QSIG is valid only when the Interface f...

Page 1002: ...eported by the BRI port should be logged Valid entries Usage network Tells call processing software whether a particular port is connected to a user network or a peer interface These entries are valid...

Page 1003: ...mber to which parameters administered on the row apply Side Synch Source T3 Timer Length sec TEI Valid entries Usage 1 15 alpha numeric characters This name is used to identify the circuit pack Valid...

Page 1004: ...Length sec Synch Source Layer 1 Stable Detect Slips Valid entries Usage flags ones change bri trunk board Page 1 of 1 ISDN BRI TRUNK CIRCUIT PACK Location 01A09 Name ______________ Interface Compandi...

Page 1005: ...eld is etsi the Protocol Version field is equivalent to b on the DS1 Circuit Pack screen QSIG When the Interface field is peer master this field must be QSIG blank You cannot leave this field blank if...

Page 1006: ...SC 1 PROGress y n ____________ __ ____________ __ 0___ 2 ALERTing y y 908957200000 __ ____________ __ 0___ 3 PROGress y y 0001________ __ ____________ __ 0___ 4 PROGress n n ____________ __ __________...

Page 1007: ...ntries Usage Any string of 1 to 10 digits These fields must be administered in pairs That is if you enter a value in one field you must enter a value in the other Valid entries Usage 00 to 62 Leading...

Page 1008: ...individual B channels B channel 1 uses the port address of the BRI Trunk Port B channel 2 uses the port address of B channel 1 incremented by 16 When adding a BRI trunk to an ISDN trunk group Avaya Co...

Page 1009: ...Language Translation screens to define the messages Set up your messages using Roman letters punctuation digits and blank spaces Diacritical marks are not supported All button names can be assigned a...

Page 1010: ...essages ad programming Page 1 of 1 LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS English Translation 1 Press button to program 1 2 Change program 2 3 Yes 1 No 2 3 4 Enter number 4 5 Press to save 5 6 Number saved 6 7 Change...

Page 1011: ...anslation 8 English DO NOT DIST Group Translation 9 English DO NOT DIST ENTRY DENIED Translation 10 English THANK YOU DO NOT DIST ENTRY CONFIRMED Translation 11 English THANK YOU DO NOT DIST REQUEST C...

Page 1012: ...1 2 Abr Pause 2 3 Abr Program 3 4 Abr Spec Char 4 5 Abr Stop 5 6 Abr Suppress 6 7 AbRing 7 8 Abr Wait 8 9 Account 9 10 AD 10 11 AddBusyInd 11 12 AdmConnAlarm 12 13 AfterCall 13 14 Alert Agent 14 chang...

Page 1013: ...Button Ring 1 2 Button View 2 3 Caller Info 3 4 CFrwd 4 5 Call Park 5 6 Call Pickup 6 7 Call Time 7 8 CAS Backup 8 9 Cancel LWC 9 10 CDR1 Fail 10 11 CDR2 Fail 11 12 CFBDA 12 13 Check In 13 14 Check O...

Page 1014: ...1 Directory 1 2 Dir Pickup 2 3 Disp Charges 3 4 DoNotDisturb 4 5 Exclusion 5 6 ExtDoNotDstrb 6 7 Far End Mute 7 8 Flash 8 9 FTC Alarm 9 10 Goto Cover 10 11 GrpPg 11 12 GrpDoNotDstrb 12 13 Hunt NS 13...

Page 1015: ...MM Call 2 3 MM Call Fwd 3 4 MM Data Conf 4 5 MM Mult Nbr 5 6 MM PC Audio 6 7 Msg 7 8 Msg Retrieve 8 9 MsgW 9 10 MsgWaitAct 10 11 MsgWaitDeact 11 12 MST Debug 12 13 Next 13 14 Night Service 14 change d...

Page 1016: ...ndAllCalls 3 4 Send TEG 4 5 Service Obsrv 5 6 Sgnl 6 7 SSVN Halt 7 8 Start Bill 8 9 Station Lock 9 10 Stored Number 10 11 Store LWC 11 12 Stroke Count 12 13 System Alarm 13 14 TermGroup 14 15 Time Dat...

Page 1017: ...utward Restriction 9 10 cs Controlled Station To Station Restriction 10 11 ct Controlled Termination Restriction 11 12 db DID Find Busy Station With CO Tones 12 13 da DID Recall Go To Attendant 13 14...

Page 1018: ...38 39 b Cover Busy 39 40 d Cover Don t Answer 40 41 s Send All Calls 41 42 to calling party to called party 42 43 VDN Vector Directory Number 43 44 hunt Station Hunting Origination 44 45 h Station Hu...

Page 1019: ...3 4 WEDNESDAY 4 14 JULY 14 5 THURSDAY 5 15 AUGUST 15 6 FRIDAY 6 16 SEPTEMBER 16 7 SATURDAY 7 17 OCTOBER 17 8 JANUARY 8 18 NOVEMBER 18 9 FEBRUARY 9 19 DECEMBER 19 10 MARCH 10 20 English SORRY TIME UNAV...

Page 1020: ...nglish IN PROGRESS Translation 9 English DELETED Translation 10 English GET DIAL TONE PUSH Cover Msg Retrieval Translation 11 English Message Center AUDIX CALL Translation 12 English CANNOT BE DELETED...

Page 1021: ...LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS 6 English party EXTENSION Translation 7 English party ISDN SID CNI Translation 8 English party PORT ID Translation 9 English party ISDN PORT ID Translation change display message...

Page 1022: ...gination 18 19 OTWD Outward 19 20 CALL call This Number 20 21 INTL International 21 22 Info Information 22 23 p Primary 23 24 s Secondary 24 25 m Mark 25 26 p Pause 26 27 s Suppress 27 28 w Wait For A...

Page 1023: ...on 37 English NO NUMBER STORED Translation 38 English TRY AGAIN Translation 39 English Ext in EMRG Q Translation 40 English HUNT GROUP NOT ADMINISTERED Translation 41 English Q time calls Translation...

Page 1024: ...Code Violation Translation 49 English ENTER REASON CODE Translation 50 English Whisper From Translation 51 English Whisper To Translation 52 English Press button to remove Translation 53 English Press...

Page 1025: ...Y OCCUPIED Translation 3 English CHECK IN COMPLETE Translation 4 English CHECK IN FAILED Translation 5 English CHECK OUT Ext Translation 6 English CHECK OUT ROOM ALREADY VACANT Translation change disp...

Page 1026: ...13 English MESSAGE LAMP ON Translation 14 English MESSAGE LAMP OFF Translation 15 English Occupied Rooms Translation 16 English Enter Room Status 1 6 Translation 17 English State Enter number from 1 6...

Page 1027: ...S 24 English REMOVE 1 REPLACE 2 Translation 25 English DID REMOVED Translation 26 English VIP CHECK IN Ext Translation 27 English SPECIFY VID DID Translation 28 English CHECK IN COMPLETE INVALID DID T...

Page 1028: ...7 PRESS BUTTON TO PROGRAM 7 8 BUTTON PROGRAMMED 8 9 INCORRECT BUTTON 9 10 BUTTON LIMIT REACHED 10 11 BUSY TRY AGAIN LATER 11 12 YOUR PHONE IS BUSY 12 13 SECURITY CODE NEEDED 13 14 BUTTON NOT CHANGED 1...

Page 1029: ...hortMode 6 7 Next 7 8 Selct 8 9 Clear 9 10 Cancel 10 11 Delete 11 12 Replace 12 13 Bksp 13 change display messages view buttons Page 1 of 9 LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS English Translation 1 Analog Bridge Ap...

Page 1030: ...Appearance 8 9 Busy Indicator 9 10 Call Appearance 10 11 Call Displayed Number 11 12 Call Forwarding 12 13 Call Park 13 14 Call Pickup 14 15 Caller Information 15 16 CAS Branch Backup 16 change displa...

Page 1031: ...ng 9 10 Headset On Off 10 11 Hunt Night Service 11 12 Coverage Call Identify 12 13 Inspect Call Appearance 13 14 Internal Auto Answer 14 15 Last Number Dialed 15 16 Link Failure Alarm 16 change displa...

Page 1032: ...Calling 7 8 PMS Printer Alarm 8 9 System Printer Alarm 9 10 Number of Queued Calls 10 11 Oldest Queued Time 11 12 ACD Release 12 13 Ringer Cut Off 13 14 System Reset Alert 14 15 Remote Access Violati...

Page 1033: ...rback 3 4 Whisper Page Off 4 5 Call Work Code 5 6 Unassigned Button 6 7 View Button 7 8 Call Timer 8 9 Add Busy Indicator 9 10 Remove Busy Indicator 10 11 VIP Wakeup 11 12 VIP Retry 12 13 Crisis Alert...

Page 1034: ...messages vustats Page 1 of 1 LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS English Translation 1 FORMAT 1 2 NOT DEFINED 2 3 DOES NOT ALLOW OR REQUIRE ID 3 4 AGENT 4 5 SPLIT SKILL 5 6 TRUNK GROUP 6 7 VDN 7 8 NOT ADMINISTERED...

Page 1035: ...IVATION ROUTE PLAN DAY TIME Translation 2 English ENTER DEACTIVATION DAY AND TIME Translation 3 English OLD ROUTE PLAN ENTER NEW PLAN Translation 4 English OLD ROUTE PLAN NEW PLAN Translation 5 Englis...

Page 1036: ...of parties currently on the conference call English Text Replacement Info Select line to cancel or another line is replaced with the letter of the line that is on soft hold change display messages tra...

Page 1037: ...add party is replaced with the letter of the line that is on soft hold change display messages transfer conference Page 3 of 4 LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS 13 English Select alerting line to answer call Tran...

Page 1038: ...icates a Listed Directory Number call and the name associated with the dialed extension The number of Listed Directory Numbers that can be assigned varies depending on system configuration See the Har...

Page 1039: ...ion number Valid entries Usage Up to 27 alphanumeric characters Enter a name used to identify the Listed Directory Number Valid entries Usage 0 to 9 1 to 8 digits For DEFINITY CSI SI S8700 IP Connect...

Page 1040: ...as the local or server node name Figure 294 List Usage Report for server node name The node name inde e72 displays as Server Node Name if it was defined as the server node name on the TFTP Server scre...

Page 1041: ...2 displays as Server Node Name if it was defined as the TFTP server node name on the TFTP Server screen Server Node Name Displays when the IP address is used on the TFTP Server screen as the server no...

Page 1042: ...e rules that exist for administering an ARS code on the Feature Access Code FAC screen Valid entries Usage 0 to 9 Any valid FAC format is acceptable up to four digits Characters or are permitted but o...

Page 1043: ...oth start with the same first digits Either the FAC DAC entries or the block of extensions must be changed to have a different first digit Loc Number Displays the location number 1 to 250 Correspondin...

Page 1044: ...r first digit 0 9 Proxy Sel Rte Pat The Proxy Selection Route Pattern field identifies the routing pattern that is used to get to the proxy server This is the route pattern assigned on the Route Patte...

Page 1045: ...y and conference calls Figure 298 Location Parameters Valid entries Usage Shows that the time set on this location is a certain amount of time ahead of the system time Shows that the time set on this...

Page 1046: ...Flashhook Interval field is n Valid entries Usage 1 to 25 See the Country code table at the beginning of the System Parameters Country Options screen description For more information see Audible Ringi...

Page 1047: ...the first forward signal digit to arrive and for subsequent digits to arrive Intercept returns to the calling party if this timer expires Valid entries Usage y Enter y to indicate that a flashhook in...

Page 1048: ...e station to switch recall signal timing interval in milliseconds Appears when the Flashhook Interval field is y Field descriptions for page 2 Figure 299 Loss Plans Valid entries Usage 1 to 25 Enter t...

Page 1049: ...conference calls that is administered on this screen is not always applied to a specific call For more information on how loss is applied to a multi party conference call see Loss Plan on Conference...

Page 1050: ...0 0 0 0 0 3 3 3 2 3 0 6 6 6 0 3 3 6 6 4 15 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 3 0 6 6 6 0 3 3 0 0 5 0 3 3 0 0 3 3 3 3 0 3 3 0 0 3 3 3 0 0 6 0 3 3 0 0 6 8 6 5 5 5 9 9 9 5 3 3 0 0 F 7 0 3 3 0 0 8 8 6 5 5 5 9 9 9 5 3 3 0...

Page 1051: ...t that may compromise Communication Manager security Once the user login is established set permissions using the Command Permission Categories screen Valid entries Usage 3 through 15 An unsigned numb...

Page 1052: ...intenance Related System Parameters screen Valid entries Usage User password Enter your password add login Page 1 of 2 LOGIN ADMINISTRATION Password of Login Making Change LOGIN BEING ADMINISTERED Log...

Page 1053: ...Passwords do not display as you type Valid entries Usage y n Enter y to have the login disabled following a security violation Valid entries Usage Customer Enter customer to indicate the login belongs...

Page 1054: ...ty Test Call Notification For security this field should be set to y for all logins Facility Test Call Notification Acknowledgment Required Valid entries Usage 1 through 99 Enter the number of days th...

Page 1055: ...Access Security Gateway This field appears only if the Access Security Gateway ASG field on the System Parameters Customer Options screen is set to y Valid entries Usage y n Enter y to have the user r...

Page 1056: ...tion has expired the login ID for the standard login is not available If an login ID not requiring ASG login has expired the login ID still may be active for the standard login as long as expiration c...

Page 1057: ...an interval that crosses a day boundary are specified by setting the Restrict From Time field greater than the Restrict To Time field For example a Restriction From Time of 17 00 and a Restrict To Ti...

Page 1058: ...the secret key If the System Generated Secret Key field is set to n the administrator is required to enter a 20 digit octal value It is important to note the value of the secret key so you can enter...

Page 1059: ...nes blank Leave this field blank for unused paging zones change paging loudspeaker Page 1 of 1 LOUDSPEAKER PAGING CDR _ Voice Paging Timeout sec ___ Code Calling Playing Cycles _ PAGING PORT ASSIGNMEN...

Page 1060: ...zones by dialing that code Code Calling TN Location Valid entries Usage 1 to 3 Enter the number of times you want the chime code to play when a user makes a page blank The field may not be blank when...

Page 1061: ...Server First and second characters are the cabinet number A through E Third character is the carrier 0 through 20 Fourth and fifth character are the slot number 01 through 04 Analog TIE trunks 01 thro...

Page 1062: ...no hardware associated with it place an X in this field Voice Paging TN Related topics See Setting up Voice Paging Over Loudspeakers on page 401 or In the Port field for Zone 1 type 01A0301 on page 4...

Page 1063: ...e gateway IP Address A display only field containing the IP address of the media gateway This field displays a blank until the media gateway registers for the first time Valid entries Usage 1 to 20 ch...

Page 1064: ...ual media modules available in December Name This field is for customer naming of the gateway Valid entries Usage 1 through 10 Enter a number between 1 X or blank where X is the maximum value for the...

Page 1065: ...ered with a communications controller Site Data This field is for general site information Valid entries Usage 1 through 80 DEFINITY CSI SI 1 through 250 S8300 Media Server S8700 IP Connect S8700 Mult...

Page 1066: ...the caller may not have talkpath with the others in the conference To prevent this include in the vector a short delay before a new party joins the Meet Me conference such as a step to collect digits...

Page 1067: ...rver or switch sends when a caller at an internal extension dials the Voice Mail System VMS access number change system parameters mode code Page 1 MODE CODE RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS MODE CODES FROM...

Page 1068: ...nication Manager sends during a system level 3 or higher reset that requests the VMS to refresh the Message Waiting MW lamps System In Day Service This value indicates to the VMS that the Avaya Commun...

Page 1069: ...ding Delay Valid entries Usage Between 75 and 500 in multiples of 25 Define in milliseconds the length of mode code digits sent to the VMS This field cannot be blank Valid entries Usage Between 75 and...

Page 1070: ...k Data Module component of the conversion resource may be either a Modular Trunk Data Module MTDM or 7400A Data Module and connects to a digital port using Digital Communications Protocol DCP the mode...

Page 1071: ...only when the Group Type field is integrated Valid entries Usage 1 255 0 No answer supervision Valid entries Usage y n Enter y to indicate that the CF and CB leads on the conversion resource are logic...

Page 1072: ...field designates what physical model pool you are going to Hold Time min Enter the maximum number of minutes that a conversion resource in the group may be held while a call waits in a queue or reserv...

Page 1073: ...appears only when the Group Type field is integrated Send Space Disconnect This field appears only when the Group Type field is integrated Valid entries Usage y n Enter y to permit conversion resourc...

Page 1074: ...ization Display only when the Group Type field is integrated When the Group Type field is combined enter the synchronization mode of the conversion resources in the group CIRCUIT PACK ASSIGNMENTS are...

Page 1075: ...alog Digital Displays when the Group Type field is combined Enter the port numbers of the modem TDM pair in a conversion resource Valid entries Usage 01 through 44 DEFINITY R or 01 through 03 DEFINITY...

Page 1076: ...d Outgoing Call Type are group ii mfc If the field Use COR for All Group II Responses is set to y the Group II Called Party Category and Use COR for Calling Party Category fields do not appear Valid e...

Page 1077: ...it Timer sec Outgoing Maximum Resend Requests _ Received Signal Gain dB _ Transmitted Signal Gain dB Request Incoming ANI non AAR ARS Outgoing Forward Signal Present Timer sec Outgoing Forward Signal...

Page 1078: ...Permissions and Public Interworking field is y Valid entries Usage 1 to 6 digits or blank Enter the prefix to apply to an extension when ANI is sent to the CO Valid entries Usage 1 to 255 Enter the nu...

Page 1079: ...wait to receive the check frequency after sending an MFE signal Communication Manager drops the call if the time runs out before it receives check frequency Valid entries Usage user type The type of...

Page 1080: ...Communication Manager drops the call if the time runs out before it receives the check frequency Valid entries Usage 1 The Belgium maintenance sequence is indicated when the CO sends an MFC maintenan...

Page 1081: ...uncement in the associated field tone Plays intercept tone for outgoing calls that cannot be completed as dialed Valid entries Usage 2 5 Determines which public signaling Communication Manager will us...

Page 1082: ...outgoing calls The timer starts and restarts when a forward tone is taken off the link and it stops when the next forward tone is applied to the link Valid entries Usage 1 to 255 Enter the maximum num...

Page 1083: ...s group ii mfc or non group ii mfc and the Outgoing Call Type field is group ii mfc or none Received Signal Gain dB Valid entries Usage y n If y Avaya Communication Manager sends and receives digits o...

Page 1084: ...group ii mfc and the Use COR for All Group II Responses field is n Indicates the category to send with ANI if requested on an outgoing R2 MFC call Valid entries Usage y n If y ANI should be requested...

Page 1085: ...git signal will be the same as the send ani signal or the next digit signal or another signal defined as next_ani_digit Valid entries Usage next digit next_ani_digit send ani Enter a value to determin...

Page 1086: ...ld is group ii mfc This field allows completion of a call without Group B signals Number of Incoming ANI Digits Valid entries Usage y n Enter y to send an outgoing forward Group I end of digit signal...

Page 1087: ...d of ani and end of digits are not defined for Tones to CO on Outgoing Forward Calls Group I Avaya Communication Manager appends ANI Not Available digits to ANI digits if the actual ANI length is less...

Page 1088: ...een received Valid entries Usage beginning ending no This field defines the side of the extension number from which to truncate when station ANI is sent to the CO and the combined length of the ANI pr...

Page 1089: ...ng Call Type is non group ii mfc When Incoming Call Type is non group ii mfc group II and group B columns do not appear Figure 312 Multifrequency Signaling Related Parameters screen change multifreque...

Page 1090: ...nitions of Group I II A and B signals on page 1094 for signal type Group II Message codes 1 to 15 display Assign a meaning to each code Valid entries Usage drop If Incoming Call Type is group ii mfc a...

Page 1091: ...aning to each code Group B This field does not appear if the Do Not Send Group B Signals to CO field is y Message codes between 1 and 15 display Assign a meaning to each code Valid entries Usage conje...

Page 1092: ...NG FORWARD SIGNAL TYPES OUTGOING BACKWARD SIGNAL TYPES Tones to CO Tones from CO Group I Group II Group A Group B 11 ______________ 2 normal 1 next digit 1 free 12 ______________ 5 attendant 2 congest...

Page 1093: ...ARD SIGNAL TYPES Tones from CO Group A Message codes between 1 and 15 display Assign a meaning to each code Valid entries Usage attendant See Definitions of Group I II A and B signals on page 1094 for...

Page 1094: ...y signal ani not avail Used on DOD calls in Brazil and Columbia Communication Manager sends this signal to the CO when it receives an ANI request and the caller s number is not available digits 1 to 1...

Page 1095: ...ledged maint call The CO sends a signal to indicate that a call is a maintenance call and Communication Manager prepares the special maintenance call sequences for the CO This signal may be used on DI...

Page 1096: ...and the originating extension is a station This signal is used in both DID and DOD calls send intercept If Communication Manager receives this signal from the CO on a DID call it returns group B inte...

Page 1097: ...sent again This signal is used on DOD calls last digit Communication Manager sends this signal to adjust the outpulsing pointer so that the last 2 digits can be resent This signal is used on DOD calls...

Page 1098: ...ed successfully If Communication Manager receives this signal on DOD calls it connects the trunk to the calling party intercept This signal indicates that the called party number is not in service or...

Page 1099: ...used by one or more Tenant Partitions However a partition may have only one music source NOTE If you use equipment that rebroadcasts music or other copyrighted materials you may be required to obtain...

Page 1100: ...h the values from the Music Sources screen Port Enter the auxiliary trunk or analog port address of the music source Duplicates are not allowed This field appears only if you entered music in Type Ent...

Page 1101: ...will appear in this field Packet Gateway Board Use this screen to administer the Packet Gateway PGATE circuit pack NOTE The PGATE screen is used with DEFINITY R configurations Field descriptions for p...

Page 1102: ...at shows the type of physical interface between the PGATE port and the adjunct Name Port Configuration Display only field that shows that the port is configured for rs232 communication Valid entries U...

Page 1103: ...e partition route table Page 1 of X Partition Routing Table Routing Patterns Route Index PGN 1 PGN 2 PGN 3 PGN 4 PGN 5 PGN 6 PGN 7 PGN 8 196 ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ 197 ____ ____ ____...

Page 1104: ...alls t1 to t999 Enter the number of a time of day table blank Assigning a coverage path is optional leave this field blank if you do not want to assign one add personal CO line Page 1 of x PERSONAL CO...

Page 1105: ...ho cancellation capability Valid entries Usage 3 8 digits Enter a code that users must dial to retrieve voice messages and to use the Demand Print Message feature blank Leave this field blank if you d...

Page 1106: ...characters are the cabinet number A through E Third character is the carrier 0 through 20 Fourth and fifth character are the slot number 01 through 04 Analog TIE trunks 01 through 31 Six and seventh c...

Page 1107: ...assigned to phones that have a CO Line button Field descriptions for page 3 Administrable timers for Personal CO Line groups appear on field descriptions for page 3 See Tone Generation on page 1251 f...

Page 1108: ...one extension number can only belong to one pickup group Field descriptions for pages 1 and 2 Figure 319 Pickup Group Ext Enter the extension assigned to a station Valid entries Usage An extension num...

Page 1109: ...rs PRI Endpoints for the Wideband Switching feature NOTE A PRI Endpoint with a width greater than 1 may be administered only if the Wideband Switching feature has been enabled on the System Parameters...

Page 1110: ...tries Usage 0 to 15 Enter the Class of Service COS to determine the features that can be activated by or on behalf of the endpoint Valid entries Usage This is the extension number used to access the P...

Page 1111: ...ter y to automatically restore calls originating from this PRI Endpoint while maintaining endpoint call status in the case of network failure if the call is over SDDN network facilities Valid entries...

Page 1112: ...1 through 03 DEFINITY CSI SI or 1 through 64 S8700 IP Connect S8700 Multi Connect S8300 Media Server First and second characters are the cabinet number A through E Third character is the carrier 0 thr...

Page 1113: ...re no constraints such as contiguity of B channels or fixed starting points Valid entries Usage y n Enter y to specify the ISDN information transfer rate for 384 Kbps of data which is comprised of six...

Page 1114: ...for DEFINITY CSI SI 1 through 416 Enter the assigned signaling group number for DEFINITY R 1 through 650 Enter the assigned signaling group number for S8300 Media Server S8700 IP Connect S8700 Multi...

Page 1115: ...of unauthorized persons to gain access to the network It is the customer s responsibility to take the appropriate steps to properly implement the features evaluate and administer the various restricti...

Page 1116: ...one and avoid use of a dial tone as a prompt when the remote access unit answers Assign the lowest possible FRL to only allow calls internal to Avaya Communication Manager As an additional step to ens...

Page 1117: ...______ 6 ________ 1__ 1_ 1__ __ __ __ ______ ______ 7 ________ 1__ 1_ 1__ __ __ __ ______ ______ 8 ________ 1__ 1_ 1__ __ __ __ ______ ______ 9 ________ 1__ 1_ 1__ __ __ __ ______ ______ 10 _______ 1...

Page 1118: ...using the corresponding barrier code This field is incremented each time a barrier code is successfully used to access the Remote Access feature A usage that exceeds the expected rate indicates impro...

Page 1119: ...on date The system administer can modify the expiration date to extend the time interval if needed No of Calls The Expiration Date and No of Calls fields can be used independently or in conjunction to...

Page 1120: ...trunk When a trunk group is dedicated to Remote Access the remote access extension number is administered on the trunk group s incoming destination field TN Valid entries Usage y n Enter y to permane...

Page 1121: ...een Field descriptions for page 1 Figure 324 Remote Call Coverage Table change coverage remote REMOTE CALL COVERAGE TABLE ENTRIES FROM 1 TO 1000 01 ________________ 16 ________________ 31 ____________...

Page 1122: ...age 1 Figure 325 Remote Office Location This field appears on the screen when the SVN Authorization Code Violation Notification Enabled field on the Security Related System Parameters screen is set to...

Page 1123: ...tion Enabled field on the Security Related System Parameters screen is set to y It specifies the node name of the remote office Site Data This field appears on the screen when the SVN Authorization Co...

Page 1124: ...ver R 1 through 24 For S8700 IP Connect Valid entries Usage 1 640 or blank For DEFINITY R S8100 Media Server with a G600 and S8100 Media Server with a CMC1 1 999 or blank For S8300 Media Server S8700...

Page 1125: ...ovides both voice and low speed data transmission calls to defined areas bands for a flat rate charge 0 This field appears when the Services Features field is outwats bnd and when ISDN PRI or ISDN BRI...

Page 1126: ...ITC is both CA TSC Request Use CA TSC on ISDN B channel connections Valid entries Usage y n Enter y in appropriate BCC column 0 1 2 3 4 or W if the BCC is valid for the associated route pattern A tru...

Page 1127: ...cation Manager blocks a hop equal to or greater than the number you enter Valid entries Usage y n Enter y to enable DCS QSIG Voice Mail Interworking Valid entries Usage 0 to 7 Enter the Facility Restr...

Page 1128: ...and the outgoing trunk is signaling type mf the MFC tone for the end of digits is sent out to the CO in place of the Use 2 places Creates a 1 5 second pause between digits being sent Do not use as th...

Page 1129: ...rier for IXC calls user For presubscribed carrier Used when an IXC is not specified none This field must be none for non ISDN trunk groups and for Bellcore NI 2 Operator Service Access If you need to...

Page 1130: ...dress number instead of the attendant Administrable when on the System Parameters Customer Options screen the ISDN Feature Plus field is y NPA This entry is not required for AAR Valid entries Usage 1...

Page 1131: ...for AAR For ARS enter a number from 0 to 4 or blank Prefix Marks set the requirements for sending a prefix digit 1 indicating a long distance call Prefix Marks apply to 7 or 10 digit Direct Distance...

Page 1132: ...end a 1 on 10 digit calls but not on 7 digit calls Use Prefix Mark 1 for HNPA calls that require a 1 to indicate long distance calls 2 Send a 1 on all 10 digit and 7 digit long distance calls Prefix M...

Page 1133: ...the fields on this screen repeat for each type of security violation We have explained them once here but the usage is the same for all See Security violations notification on page 1654 for more infor...

Page 1134: ...n Enabled y Originating Extension _____ Referral Destination _____ Login Threshold 5_ Time Interval 0 03 Announcement Extension _____ SVN Remote Access Violation Notification Enabled y Originating Ext...

Page 1135: ...Usage 1 99 1 255 for Station Security code Enter the number of access attempts that are permitted before a referral call is made In general it is good to keep this number low If you are doing testing...

Page 1136: ...Parameters for DEFINITY R Valid entries Usage 0 01 to 7 59 The range for the time interval is one minute to eight hours Entered in the screen x xx For example if you want the time interval to be one m...

Page 1137: ...ation Security Code Length This determines the minimum required length of the Station Security Codes that you enter on the Station screen change system parameters security Page 2 of 2 SECURITY RELATED...

Page 1138: ...tenance circuit pack RS 232 interface SYSAM LCL A direct cable connection to the SYSAM LCL G3 MT local system administrator s terminal port on the System Access and Maintenance circuit pack on the act...

Page 1139: ...n Manager MGR1 The direct connect system administration and maintenance access interface located on the processor circuit pack For more information on the circuit pack see the Hardware Guide for Avaya...

Page 1140: ...parameters needed the fields that appear on this screen change depending on the value of the Group Type field Field descriptions are alphabetized for easier reference Field descriptions for page 1 Fi...

Page 1141: ...Service Protocol _ Near end Node Name Far end Node Name Near end Listen Port Far end Listen Port Far end Network Region LRQ Required n Calls Share IP Signaling Connection n RRQ Required n Media Encry...

Page 1142: ...alid entries Usage y n Enter y to automatically remove from service the trunks assigned to this signaling group when IP transport perfor mance falls below limits administered on the Mainte nance Relat...

Page 1143: ...eld is atm Country Protocol Appears when the Group Type field is atm Valid entries Usage y n Enter y for inter connection between servers running Avaya Com munication Manager If y then LRQ Required mu...

Page 1144: ...1 through 44 DEFINITY R or 01 through 03 DEFINITY CSI SI or 1 through 64 S8700 IP Connect S8700 Multi Connect S8300 Media Server First and second characters are the cabinet number A through E Third ch...

Page 1145: ...roup The node name must be administered on the IP Node Names screen Group Number A display only field identifying the signaling group Valid entries Usage Max 40 character string or blank Enter the nam...

Page 1146: ...protocol or when using SBS signaling trunks isdn pri Integrated Service Digital Network Primary Rate Interface sip For SIP on the Avaya S8300 Media Server S8500 Media Server S8700 IP Connect or S8700...

Page 1147: ...ut going through the Avaya DEFINITY TDM bus Initially support for SIP Trunks requires the default of n Valid entries Usage y n Enter n if the far end server is running Avaya Communication Man ager Ent...

Page 1148: ...Network Call Transfer Appears when the Group Type field is atm For more information see Avaya MultiVantage Call Center Software Release 11 Network Call Redirection Valid entries Usage y n Enter y to e...

Page 1149: ...ies Usage 8 30 alphanu meric charac ters Enter a value for the passphrase used to generate a shared secret for symmetric encryption of the media session key The same passphrase must be assigned to the...

Page 1150: ...s atm h 323 or isdn pri Valid entries Usage y n Enter y if the signaling group serves a remote office Valid entries Usage y n Enter y to use SBS signaling trunk groups The default is n Valid entries U...

Page 1151: ...trunk group number If there is more than one trunk group assigned to this signaling group the group entered in this field will be the one that can accept incoming calls For DEFINITY R 1 99 or blank Fo...

Page 1152: ...allowed Signaling Group screen page 2 Figure 335 Signaling Group screen when the Group Type field is atm Valid entries Usage 32 1023 or blank Enter a number between 32 1023 or blank Valid entries Usa...

Page 1153: ...end must use channels 1 through 5 7 and 24 Signaling Group screen page 2 Figure 336 Signaling Group screen Administered NCA TSC Assignment Page Valid entries Usage 009 through 256 or blank Enter the...

Page 1154: ...cs Use this for the DCS Over ISDN PRI D channel feature gateway Use this when the administered NCA TSC is used as one end in the gateway channel connecting to a BX 25 link If gate way is entered then...

Page 1155: ...near end or the far end as needed Use as needed so that the administered NCA TSC will be estab lished the first time the administered NCA TSC is needed it can be set up either by the near end or far e...

Page 1156: ...1 2 and 3 These pages are available for you to enter descriptive information about the buildings floors and phone set colors You may enter any valid keyboard character If you want to indicate that a...

Page 1157: ...Type Security Code TN 1 Port Coverage Path 1 COR 1 Name Coverage Path 2 COS 1 Hunt to Station STATION OPTIONS Loss Group 2 Personalized Ringing Pattern 3 Data Module n Message Lamp Ext 1014 Speakerph...

Page 1158: ...n n Per Station CPN Send Calling Number _ Service Link Mode as needed Multimedia Mode basic MWI Served User Type ______ Display Client Redirection n Automatic Moves AUDIX Name Select Last Used Appeara...

Page 1159: ...zed alphabetically for easy access 1 Step Clearing Valid entries Usage y n If set to y the call terminates again at the WCBRI terminal when the user drops from the call change station 1014 Page 4 0f 4...

Page 1160: ...ber system Allows the phone user to access the system abbreviated dialing list Valid entries Usage continuous Enter continuous to cause all calls to this phone to ring continuously single Enter single...

Page 1161: ...waiting message This field appears only if Audible Message Waiting is set to y on the System Parameters Customer Options screen Note that this field does not control the Message Waiting lamp Audix Nam...

Page 1162: ...and moved to another physical location the Emergency Location Extension field must be changed for that extension or the USA Automatic Location Identification data base must be manually updated If the...

Page 1163: ...ng from one location and plugging into a new location once Enter once and the DCP phone can be unplugged and plugged into a new location once After a move the field is set to done the next time that r...

Page 1164: ...og Automatic Callback Button Assignments Enter the abbreviated software name to assign a feature button For a list of feature buttons see Telephone feature Buttons on page 114 NOTE If you want to use...

Page 1165: ...ed field is set to internal or all DCS calls are delivered to the cell phone When the Calls Allowed field is set to external or none DCS calls are not delivered NOTE Incoming calls from other EC500 us...

Page 1166: ...em Parameters screen Cell Phone Number Contains the unformatted cell phone s published external number This field may contain a 3 digit area code plus the 7 digit main number If the same Cell Phone Nu...

Page 1167: ...ord attached to the receiver This is a free form entry and can be in any measurement units COS Enter the desired Class of Service COS number to select allowed features Country Protocol Enter the proto...

Page 1168: ...or each interface Valid entries Usage y Coverage treatment is provided after forwarding regardless of the value of the Coverage After Forwarding field on the System Parameters Call Coverage Call Forwa...

Page 1169: ...ng Option is set to default Enter a list number associated with the abbreviated dialing list When the user goes off hook for a data call and presses the Return button following the DIAL prompt the sys...

Page 1170: ...rect audio connections between IP endpoints Display Caller ID Appears when the Type field is CallrID For CallrID type phones or analog phones with Caller ID adjuncts only Display Cartridge For 7404 D...

Page 1171: ...ge y When set to y the redirection information for a call originating from a Client Room and terminating to this station displays n When set to n this station s display does not show the redirection i...

Page 1172: ...ammed into the endpoint contain at least 9 digits For example if the SPID is 1234 and Endpt ID is 01 then the SPID administered on the terminal is 000123401 The three leading zeros are necessary to cr...

Page 1173: ...eld followed by the word EMERGENCY Characters 18 through 24 of the name field do not appear at all Feature Module Enter y to indicate the station is connected to a feature module Entering y displays a...

Page 1174: ...ice destination Also any extension within a DDC group UDC group or TEG can have Hot Line Service assigned Loudspeaker Paging Access can be used with Hot Line Service to provide automatic access to pag...

Page 1175: ...ter y to allow IP endpoints to be connected through the IP circuit pack in the server switch in IP format without going through the Avaya DEFINITY TDM bus Valid entries Usage y n Enter y indicate that...

Page 1176: ...ights The phone set displays the names and numbers of unsuccessful callers Valid entries Usage y n Enter y to restrict other users from reading or canceling the voice messages or retrieving messages v...

Page 1177: ...rtual extension Valid entries Usage audix Enter audix if the messages are stored on the Audio Information Exchange System none Enter none if LWC messages will not be stored spe Enter spe if LWC messag...

Page 1178: ...tation Message Waiting Indicator This field appears only for ISDN BRI data modules and for 500 2500 K2500 7104A 6210 6218 6220 8110 and VRU telephones This field is independent of the administration o...

Page 1179: ...8700 IP Connect and S8700 Multi Connect 99 for DEFINITY CSI S8300 Media Server and S8100 Media Server with a CMC1 blank Enter a valid trunk group number for mobility routing This trunk group is used f...

Page 1180: ...unication STE Tone Commander The NI BRI telephone is a model 6210 and 6220 Tone Commander Other The NI BRI telephone is another model for example a Nortel 5317T Valid entries Usage y n If this station...

Page 1181: ...up calls Valid entries Usage y Enter y to allow users to select ring behavior individually for each call appr brdg appr or abrdg appr on the station and to enable Automatic Abbreviated and Delayed rin...

Page 1182: ...g pattern on its mapped to physical phone Enter a Personalized Ringing Pattern L 530 Hz M 750 Hz and H 1060 Hz Per Station CPN Send Calling Number Valid entries Usage 1 MMM standard ringing 2 HHH 3 LL...

Page 1183: ...ers on the port has no SPID assigned which includes telephones that have no SPID initialization capability This field is display only for H 323 set types and 4600 set types The system assigns an IP wh...

Page 1184: ...ent such as SLC carriers or impedance compensators optioned for 600 ohm input impedance and the distance to the equipment from the system is less than 3 000 feet Valid entries Usage y n Enter y to all...

Page 1185: ...advisory and agree to use an alternative telephone to dial all emergency calls from remote locations Please contact your Avaya respresentative if you have questions about emergency calls from IP phon...

Page 1186: ...call routed over the it s trunk reaches the PSAP that covers the server or switch If the media server or switch uses ISDN trunks for emergency calls the digit string is the telephone number provided t...

Page 1187: ...cters To identify the phone location Up to 5 characters To identify the guest room number if this station is one of several to be assigned a guest room and the Display Room Information in Call Display...

Page 1188: ...they can immediately place or take another call After 10 seconds the link is dropped and a new link would have to be established to place or take another call permanent Use permanent for busy call ce...

Page 1189: ...irst BRI on a port any other BRI assignment to that port are blocked NOTE If you have set the Port field to X for an ISDN BRI extension and intend to use Terminal Translation Initialization TTI to ass...

Page 1190: ...hones that are not in the table use the Alias Station screen NOTE You cannot change an analog phone administered with hardware to a virtual extension if TTI is y on the Feature Related System Paramete...

Page 1191: ...isconnect without C D tones ds1fd or ds1sa VRU with forward disconnect without C D tones VRUFD or VRUSA Terminals 510D 510 515BCT 515 Multiappearance hybrid 7303S 7303S 7313H 7305H 7305S 7305S 7305S 7...

Page 1192: ...0 7410 7434D 7434D 7444D 7444D 8403B 8403B 8405B 8405B 8405B 8405B 8405D 8405D 8405D 8405D 8410B 8410B 8410D 8410D 8411B 8411B 8411D 8411D 8434D 8434D CALLMASTER I 602A1 CALLMASTER II III IV 603A1 603...

Page 1193: ...7300 PC voice data 6538 9 Constellation Test Line ATMS 105TL No hardware assigned at the time of administration XDID use when Avaya Communication Manager later assigns a DID number to this station XDI...

Page 1194: ...e When the Type field is XMOBILE the Mobility Trunk Group field must be administered XMOBILE EC500 DECT PHS XMOBILE ISDN BRI data module 7500 7500 SBS Extension SBS test extension no hardware sbs Vali...

Page 1195: ...ress the GO TO COVER button during this time interval change system parameters coverage forwarding page 1 SYSTEM PARAMETERS CALL COVERAGE CALL FORWARDING CALL COVERAGE FORWARDING PARAMETERS Local Cvg...

Page 1196: ...short interval often is appropriate because the intended party either is near the phone or not present However when ringing off net locations you cannot assume how near the intended party is to the ph...

Page 1197: ...ent is being played to the originating party and we should move the call immediately to the next available coverage point However a PROGRESS message with a Progress Indicator of inband information may...

Page 1198: ...een will work for a user for calls that go to remote coverage Normally with QSIG Diversion with Rerouting turned on the local system passes control of a forwarded call to the remote QSIG media server...

Page 1199: ...to the forwarded from party Coverage After Forwarding This field governs whether an unanswered forwarded call is provided coverage treatment Valid entries Usage y n Enter y to allow Coverage After Fo...

Page 1200: ...ff net call is carried end to end by ISDN facilities the SBA is maintained and there is no cut through delay Coverage Of Calls Redirected Off Net Enabled This field allows you to enable disable the Co...

Page 1201: ...dispense with the call classifier on interworked calls and rely on the ISDN trunk signalling messages Disable call classifier for CCRON over SIP trunks This field provides a customer the means of dir...

Page 1202: ...at may get tandemed back to the originating node as a network answer In such a scenario the originating media server or switch interprets the call as answered leading to some undesirable behavior To a...

Page 1203: ...eece 18 China 19 Hong Kong 20 Thailand 21 Macedonia 22 Poland 23 Brazil 24 Nordic 25 South Africa Code Country change system parameters country options Page 1 of 1 SYSTEM PARAMETERS COUNTRY OPTIONS Se...

Page 1204: ...Set Appears only for 607 46xx 64xx and 84xx telephone sets Enable Busy Tone Disconnect for Analog Loop start Trunks This field allows Communication Manager to recognize a busy tone from the central of...

Page 1205: ...cuit pack Tone Detection Mode The country code specifies the type of tone detection used on a TN420B or later tone detection circuit pack Valid entries Usage y n Enables howler tone Valid entries Usag...

Page 1206: ...1 indicates Canada or the United States 2 indicates any other location and allows the use of International Consolidation circuit packs and telephones Maximum Off PBX Telephones EC500 Default 0 A numb...

Page 1207: ...each XMOBILE station is assigned to a wireless handset Each XMOBILE station counts as a station and a port in terms of system configuration Platform A display only field that identifies via a number m...

Page 1208: ...f system Maximum Concurrently Registered IP Stations Specifies the maximum number of IP stations that may be registered at one time Must be less than or equal to the Maximum Ports field on this page A...

Page 1209: ...5 DEFINITY SI and CSI S8100 Media Servers and S8300 Media Server For values greater than 1 the Val Full 1 Hour Capacity field on page 4 of the System Parameters Customer Options screen must be set to...

Page 1210: ...orks Long distance calls can be routed over the best available and most economical routes Provides partitioning of ARS routing patterns ARS AAR Partitioning Provides the ability to partition AAR and A...

Page 1211: ...ng Answering Machine Detection Selective Listening Switch Classified Outbound Calls ISDN Redirecting Number Information the original dialed number information is provided within the ASAI messages if i...

Page 1212: ...Branch Provides Centralized Attendant Service Branch See CAS Main for more information Cannot be set to y if the Attendant Vectoring and Centralized Attendant fields are y CAS Main Provides multi loca...

Page 1213: ...Visor ASAI Technical Reference Cvg Of Calls Redirected Off net Provides continued monitoring for calls redirected to off network remote coverage points Uses call classification via call classifier cir...

Page 1214: ...tures Must be y to enable the Enhanced Conferencing features display system parameters customer options page 4 OPTIONAL FEATURES Emergency Access to Attendant ISDN Feature Plus Enable dadmin login ISD...

Page 1215: ...ee 64 KBPS voice or data B Channels and one 64 Kbps signaling D Channel for total bandwidth of 1 544 Mbps Forced Entry of Account Codes Allows system administration to force account users to enter acc...

Page 1216: ...the ISDN PRI field is y ISDN Network Call Redirection Administrable if the ISDN PRI or ISDN BRI Trunk field is y Network Call Redirection NCR redirects an incoming ISDN call from a server running Avay...

Page 1217: ...e central office Multimedia Appl Server Interface MASI Allows users of the Multimedia Communications Exchange MMCX to take advantage of certain Avaya Communication Manager telephony features Multimedi...

Page 1218: ...e Enable Operation of PNC Duplication field is set with the Enable Operation of SPE Switch Processing Element Duplication field to provide non standard reliability levels high critical or ATM PNC Netw...

Page 1219: ...allows up to 60 minutes storage capacity per pack and multiple integrated announcement circuit packs Remote Office Allows administration of a remote office Restrict Call Forward Off Net The system ca...

Page 1220: ...sion from a terminal connected to that port Must be set to y for Automatic Customer Telephone Rearrangement Time of Day Routing Provides AAR and ARS routing of calls based on the time of day and day o...

Page 1221: ...must be answered to be considered acceptable Business Advocate Software that provides an integrated set of advanced features to optimize call center performance If set to n the Least Occupied Agent f...

Page 1222: ...eases the number of skills an agent can log in to from four to 20 Increases the number of agent skill preference levels from two to 16 Expert Agent Selection EAS Provides skills based routing of calls...

Page 1223: ...a specified user to observe an in progress call on a listen only or listen and talk basis Service Observing Remote By FAC Allows users to service observe calls from a remote location or a local statio...

Page 1224: ...ring Best Service Routing Enables the Best Service Routing feature Through special vector commands Best Service Routing allows you to compare splits or skills at local and remote locations and queue a...

Page 1225: ...ntracted for The total number of logged in CentreVu Advocate agents must be equal to or less than the number allowed in the Logged In ACD Agents field The number of logged in CentreVu Advocate agents...

Page 1226: ...nsfer by join No path replacement capabilities are provided Call Completion also known as Automatic Callback Centralized Attendant Can be enabled only if the Supplementary Services with Rerouting fiel...

Page 1227: ...o the voice mail box on the voice mail system when a QSIG link connects Avaya Communication Manager and the voice mail system Value Added VALU Provides additional QSIG functionality including the abil...

Page 1228: ...ximum IP Registrations by Product ID Limit Maximum number of IP registrations allowed Valid displays Usage 1000 or 5000 depending on your server configuration Maximum number of IP registrations allowe...

Page 1229: ...ystem Parameters Customer Options screen is set to y or when the Enable Busy Tone Disconnect for Analog loop start Trunks field on the System Parameters Country Options screen is set to y This screen...

Page 1230: ...Valid entries Usage y n To use the default United States tone detection set this field to y If you enter n the US Special Information Tones SIT Algorithm field appears Valid entries Usage y To use th...

Page 1231: ...one duration NOTE On the Feature Related System Parameters screen set the Off Premises Tone Detect Timeout Interval field to its maximum value Duration Minimum Specifies the lower limit in millisecond...

Page 1232: ...fication field on the System Parameters Customer Options screen is n only busy can be entered into this Tone Name field If Busy Tone Disconnect is enabled only busy can be entered into this field Vali...

Page 1233: ...ng Access Telecommuting Access Extension This only allows remote access to the Telecommuting Access feature Related Topics See Configuring Avaya Communication Manager for Telecommuting on page 303 for...

Page 1234: ...will be empty if no consoles are assigned to it Attendant Vectoring VDN This field appears only if on the System Parameters Customer Options screen the Attendant Vectoring field is y and the Tenant P...

Page 1235: ...Alert TAAS Extension This field appears only if you entered an X in Ext Alert Port TAAS Valid entries Usage A valid port address or X 01 through 44 DEFINITY R or 01 through 03 DEFINITY CSI SI or 1 thr...

Page 1236: ...s Usage 40 alpha numeric characters or blank You may leave the description field blank but future administration will be easier if you provide descriptive information change tenant 18 Tenant 18 CALLIN...

Page 1237: ...ries 8403 8405B 8405B 8405D 8405D 8410B 8410D 8411B 8411D 8434D and 2420 phones NOTE Only authorized Avaya personnel can administer this screen Figure 362 603 302 Terminal Parameters Valid entries Usa...

Page 1238: ...B __ Voice Receive dB __ Touch Tone Sidetone dB __ Touch Tone Transmit dB __ BUILT IN SPEAKER LEVELS Voice Transmit dB __ Voice Receive dB __ Touch Tone Sidetone dB __ 6402 BUILT IN SPEAKER LEVELS Voi...

Page 1239: ...e Level Determines whether DCP Line Voltage used by the telephones is forced high forced low or allowed to automatically adjust This field only appears if Customize Parameters is y Handset Expander En...

Page 1240: ...ange any values in the PRIMARY LEVELS or BUILT IN SPEAKER LEVELS areas Valid entries Usage default speaker handset unchangeable The speaker resets to the default settings while the adjusted handset se...

Page 1241: ...evel fields to 14 0 dB If you attempt to submit the Terminal Parameters screen with all Primary Levels set to 14 0 dB you receive an error message ADJUNCT LEVELS The following fields appear only if yo...

Page 1242: ...COR The members could all be termination restricted but still receive calls if the group is not restricted The system allows for as many as 32 TEGs with up to 4 members each An extension number can be...

Page 1243: ...the terminating extension group Group Name Enter the name used to identify the terminating extension group Group Number A display only field when the screen is accessed using an administration comman...

Page 1244: ...or member name member of TEG where call terminated will be sent to the originating user mbr name Specify whether the TEG group name or member name member of TEG where call terminated will be sent to t...

Page 1245: ...in Memory A display only field showing the name of the file currently in Communication Manager memory File Size A display only field showing the number of bytes transferred File Status A display only...

Page 1246: ...1 Figure 367 Time of Day Coverage Table Valid entries Usage 1 15 characters procr Processor CLAN for S8300 Media Server S8700 Multi Connect and S8700 IP Connect Valid entries Usage 1 15 characters Val...

Page 1247: ...Time of Day Routing Plans each scheduled to change up to 6 times a day for each day in the week Match the Time of Day Routing Plan PGN with the PGN field on the Partition Routing Table for the route...

Page 1248: ...calling areas be restricted as much as possible through the use of the RCL Restricted Call List and Toll List fields on this screen Valid entries Usage 00 00 to 23 59 Time is represented using a 24 ho...

Page 1249: ...that this Toll Analysis Table is the default for all port network cabinet locations change toll 1 Page 1 of 1 TOLL ANALYSIS Percent Full _ Location Total Toll CDR Unrestricted Call List Dialed String...

Page 1250: ...match to this dialed string Valid entries Usage 1 to Max Enter the minimum number of user dialed digits the system collects to match to this dialed string Valid entries Usage x All entries of x and t...

Page 1251: ...various circumstances Figure 370 Tone Generation screen 40 10 10 x 41 10 10 x 50 10 10 x 51 10 10 x 60 10 10 x 61 10 10 x 70 10 10 x 71 10 10 x 80 10 10 x 81 10 10 x 90 10 10 x 91 10 10 x Valid entrie...

Page 1252: ...on set to be used A TN780 vintage 5 or greater or a TN2182 is required if Belgian Tones Country code 8 are specified Valid entries Usage y n A value of n implies the tone will either be administered o...

Page 1253: ...igure 371 Tone Generation screen Cadence Step Display only fields that identify the number of each tone cadence step change tone generation Page 2 of X TONE GENERATION CUSTOMIZED TONES Tone Name Caden...

Page 1254: ...modifies Valid entries Usage blank If this field is blank all entries are ignored in the corre sponding Tone Frequency Level field 1 call wait 2 call wait 3 call wait busy busy verify call wait ringba...

Page 1255: ...a goto goto An entry of goto means to repeat all or part of the sequence beginning at the specified cadence step 350 17 25 350 425 4 0 350 440 13 75 375 425 15 0 404 11 0 404 16 0 404 425 11 0 404 450...

Page 1256: ...or disappear according to specific field settings The field descriptions that follow may include fields from other group types that are not shown on this example screen Figure 372 Tie Trunk Group add...

Page 1257: ...ommunication Manager and timing ceases after the far end sends answer supervision If the timer expires Communication Manager acts as if it had received answer supervision On senderized operation the t...

Page 1258: ...bility Class field is used to select the appropriate facilities for incoming ISDN calls Avaya Communication Manager compares the entry in the BCC field to the value of the Bearer Capability informatio...

Page 1259: ...eld This field appears if the Group Type field is co or fx This field is used when the receiving end media server or switch initiates the disconnection of incoming calls It effectively extends the Inc...

Page 1260: ...ords If the Record Outgoing Calls Only field on the CDR System Parameters screen is n then incoming calls on this trunk group will also generate call detail records n Calls over this trunk group will...

Page 1261: ...alls when Comm Type is avd The Signaling Mode field on the DS1 Circuit Pack screen must be set for either common chan or CAS signaling data Enter data only when all calls across the trunk group origin...

Page 1262: ...ntact your Avaya representative NOTE For DID trunk types country code 19 is not accepted in the Trunk Group screen in Communication Manager This will be supported at a later date Valid entries Usage a...

Page 1263: ...n the group must be idle or busied out Valid entries Usage y Enter y to allow users to get dial tone directly from the central office Outgoing calls over this trunk group will bypass AAR ARS if you re...

Page 1264: ...t to leave the field set to n unless you need dial access to test the trunk group Dial Detection Applies only to TN2199 ports The Country field must be 15 Digit Absorption List This field assigns a di...

Page 1265: ...r end deletes or inserts digits on incoming calls The remote tgs button on a remote server switch for example tries to dial a TAC on your switch If your end adds or deletes digits it defeats this oper...

Page 1266: ...cation Manager cannot detect the end of the call Communication Manager will not allow trunk to trunk transfers unless it believes that at least one party on the call can provide disconnect supervision...

Page 1267: ...and the trunks are reset Also remember that Avaya Communication Manager must receive answer supervision on outgoing analog CO FX WATS Tie Tandem and Access trunks before it will recognize a disconnec...

Page 1268: ...party Appears only if the Country field is 15 and the Trunk Type field is 2 wire ac 2 wire dc or 3 wire This applies only to the TN2199 port Drop Treatment This field only applies to DID trunks It de...

Page 1269: ...eive real answer supervision a connect Event report is sent when the Answer Supervision Timeout occurs Expected Digits NOTE Set this field to blank if the Digit Treatment field is set to insert and th...

Page 1270: ...and releasing trunk groups see your system s Maintenance manual Valid entries Usage y n Valid entries Usage 1 to 27 characters Enter a unique name that provides information about the trunk group Don t...

Page 1271: ...ta and video signals and provide the bandwidth needed for applications such as high speed data transfer and video conferencing ISDN trunks can also efficiently combine multiple services on one trunk g...

Page 1272: ...ing message will contain these digits If the Format field is blank in this case the value defaults to pub unk If the Format field on page 2 of this screen is also administered as unknown the trunk gro...

Page 1273: ...PNP 9 unk unk unknown 0 unknown 0 Valid entries Usage blank Leave this field blank if the Trunk Type in out field is not auto an extension number Calls go to the extension you enter You may enter any...

Page 1274: ...ve all incoming digits from the far end switch Valid entries Usage tone Enter tone to use Dual Tone Multifrequency DTMF addressing also known as touch tone in the U S Entering tone actually allows the...

Page 1275: ...p Type field is tie and the Trunk Signaling Type field is tge tgi or tgu NOTE Unless one or more trunk members are administered the administered value is not saved when you submit the screen press ENT...

Page 1276: ...tor for identification purposes in the Calling Number and or Connected Number IEs and in the QSIG Party Number Valid entries are public unknown private and unk pvt Public indicates that the number pla...

Page 1277: ...ressing method used by non touch tone phones If you have a full touch tone system internally and a connection to a central office that only supports rotary dialing for example it would be appropriate...

Page 1278: ...are available If you enter a higher number a caller hears confirmation tone when no trunk is available for the outgoing call The caller can then hang up and wait when a trunk becomes available Commun...

Page 1279: ...This field appears when the Trunk Signaling Type field is cont or dis and only applies to TN2140 ports used for Italian and Hungarian tie trunks Send Answer Supervision This field appears when the Tr...

Page 1280: ...me Service Type Indicates the service for which this trunk group is dedicated The following table provides a listing of predefined entries In addition to the Services Features listed in this table any...

Page 1281: ...g both voice and low speed data transmission capabilities from the user location to defined service areas referred to as bands the widest band is 5 public ntwrk Public network calls It is the equivale...

Page 1282: ...erently from the default you may need to invert one or both bits to change 1 to 0 and vice versa in the A bit for example Supplementary Service Protocol Appears only when trunk group Type is ISDN Vali...

Page 1283: ...ust be assigned to each trunk group CDR reports use the TAC to identify each trunk group e Allows ASAI Flexible Billing Allows DCS with rerouting DCS with Rerouting must be y and the Used for DCS fiel...

Page 1284: ...sequence of flash signal and dial signals from the Communication Manager telephone on an active trunk call Trunk Gain This field specifies the amplification applied to the trunks in this group With th...

Page 1285: ...ies Usage ascend Enter to enable a linear trunk hunt search from the lowest to highest numbered channels cyclical Enter to enable a circular trunk hunt based on the sequence the trunks were administer...

Page 1286: ...ould be administered as tgi on both servers DIOD trunks support pulsed and continuous E M signaling in Brazil and discontinuous E M signaling in Hungary Use the following entries for DIOD trunks Use t...

Page 1287: ...will receive incoming digits The term after the slash tells Communication Manager how and when it should send outgoing digits auto Used for immediate connection to a single preset destination incomin...

Page 1288: ...at the same place cont Continuous signaling is used with Italian E M tie trunks The server switch seizes a trunk by sending a continuous seizure signal for at least the duration specified by the Inco...

Page 1289: ...low you reduce the allowed start time and duration thus reducing the window in which glare could occur Unlike other fields on this screen the Wink Timer field therefore controls 2 different variables...

Page 1290: ...le screen Figure 373 CO Trunk Group CAUTION Customers Do not change fields on this page without assistance from Avaya or your network service provider Valid entries Usage 300 to 5000 in increments of...

Page 1291: ...ield is outgoing or two way For ISDN trunk groups it appears when the Charge Advice field is not none Charge Type Entries in this field are text strings you use to describe charges related to a phone...

Page 1292: ...it appears when the Charge Advice field is not none DS1 Echo Cancellation Reduces voice call echo Valid entries Usage y n Enter y to allow overlap sending to a Central Office Valid entries Usage 1 3...

Page 1293: ...n tandem calls if the outgoing trunk requires ANI Then the digits are sent to the outgoing trunk Internal Alert Long Holding Time hours This field appears only when the ACA Assignment field is y Valid...

Page 1294: ...hen the Incoming Dial Type field is mf or the Group Type field is tie the Trunk Signaling Type field is blank cont or dis and the Incoming Dial Type field is mf Valid entries Usage y n Enter y if hour...

Page 1295: ...Numbering screen An entry of unk pvt also determines the Type of Number from the ISDN Private Numbering screen but the Numbering Plan Indicator is unknown Outgoing ANI If this trunk group is used for...

Page 1296: ...the remote switch in the network with which the trunk will communicate on a DCS signaling link Per Call CPN Blocking Code For Access APLT CO DIOD FX tandem tie and WATS trunk groups only Valid entrie...

Page 1297: ...ers Appears when the Group Type field is isdn or sip Indicates whether to replace unavailable numbers with administrable strings for incoming and outgoing calls assigned to the specified trunk group T...

Page 1298: ...administered to expect this behavior If the administered value of this field is either far end or both ends any abnormally long incoming seizure including failure to drop from a completed call is ass...

Page 1299: ...number is sent presentation restricted NOTE The AT T Switched Network Protocol does not support restricted displays of connected numbers Therefore if you administer the 1a country protocol protocol ve...

Page 1300: ...eld is 15 and the Shuttle field is y Enter 1 3 to indicate which B signal should be used to start a call The value administered in this field must be coordinated with your central office See Start Pos...

Page 1301: ...field to bx 25 before submitting the screen Field descriptions for page 3 Group Type co The figure below shows a common configuration for page 3 of the Trunk Group screen when the Group Type field is...

Page 1302: ...e 10 to 2550 in increments of 10 Enter the duration of the answer signal pulse Valid entries Usage y n Enter y to allow Communication Manager to recognize a busy tone signal as a disconnect on this tr...

Page 1303: ...nterval between the seizure acknowledgment on the receiving server or switch and the outpulsing of digits by this server Valid entries Usage 20 to 5100 in increments of 20 Specifies the duration the w...

Page 1304: ...imum acceptable interval in msec between the moment your server running Communication Manager sends an outgoing seizure and the moment it receives a seizure acknowledgment If acknowledgment is receive...

Page 1305: ...and TN2199 ports receive this timer For DID trunks only TN2199 and TN429D or later receive this timer Valid entries Usage 100 to 25500 in increments of 100 Enter the minimum interval that must elapse...

Page 1306: ...een seizure acknowledgment of a trunk and the outpulsing of digits This field cannot be blank For trunks that do not provide seizure acknowledgment the timer specifies the minimum time between seizure...

Page 1307: ...ion On senderized operation the timer begins after the switch sends the last digit collected The timer ceases when answer supervision is received If the timer expires Communication Manager acts as if...

Page 1308: ...ng or two way and the Trunk Type field is 2 wire ac 2 wire dc or 3 wire This timer is sent only to the TN2199 circuit pack Outgoing Seizure Response sec This timer is sent to the TN438B TN439 TN447 TN...

Page 1309: ...Delay msec This field appears only if the Trunk Type field is dis and the trunk group Direction field is incoming or two way Only TN2140 ports receive this timer Valid entries Usage 100 to 25500 in in...

Page 1310: ...nk group Tone msec This field appears only if the Trunk Type field is blank All CO DIOD and Tie circuit packs that accept administrable timers accept this timer This timer is also sent to the followin...

Page 1311: ...Make msec and Break msec fields must equal 100 10 to 40 in increments of 5 If the PPS field is 20 the sum of the Make msec and Break msec fields must equal 50 Valid entries Usage 12k The TN465B or lat...

Page 1312: ...the system is outpulsing digits using dial pulse signaling The field cannot be blank 20 to 80 in increments of 5 If the PPS field is 10 the sum of the Make msec and Break msec fields must equal 100 10...

Page 1313: ...alled Called Del Insert Feature Len Number _____________ ___ _______________ ___ ______________ __________ _______ _____________ ___ _______________ ___ ______________ __________ _______ _____________...

Page 1314: ...ing or two way and the ATMS field is y on the Feature Related System Parameters screen The figure below shows a common configuration for page 4 of the Trunk Group screen when the Group Type field is c...

Page 1315: ...someone from the trunk vendor who can be contacted in the event of problems with the trunks Valid entries Usage Use this field to record the length of the trunk group in kilometers or miles 0 4 digits...

Page 1316: ...ty Test Circuit AFTC ZLC 12 Central Office switches equipped with various TTL equipment that provide 100 102 or 105 test line capabilities 56A Other vendors switches may be supported if compatible tes...

Page 1317: ...Marginal Threshold Dev 404 Hz Loss Marginal Threshold Dev 404 Hz Loss Valid entries Usage 0 to 22 alphanumeric characters Enter the name of the vendor supplying the terminating test line TTL Valid ent...

Page 1318: ...the maximum positive deviation of measured loss at 2804 Hz from the 1004 Hz test tone loss level in dB allowed before reporting a trunk as out of tolerance Smaller dB values are more restrictive Valid...

Page 1319: ...rance Smaller values are more restrictive Valid entries Usage 34 to 74 Enter the maximum C notched signal dependent noise interference in dBmC allowed before reporting a trunk as out of tolerance Smal...

Page 1320: ...ed loss at 404 Hz from the 1004 Hz test tone loss level in dB allowed before reporting a trunk as unacceptable Smaller dB values are more restrictive Valid entries Usage 0 to 9 Enter the maximum negat...

Page 1321: ...ise interference in dBmC above reference noise terminating on a phone as measured within the voice band frequency range 500 to 2500 Hz allowed before reporting a trunk as unacceptable Smaller values a...

Page 1322: ...acceptable Larger values are more restrictive add trunk group next TRUNK GROUP Administered Members min max xxx yyy Total Administered Members xxx GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS Port Code Sfx Name Night Mod...

Page 1323: ...blank Mode This field specifies the signaling mode used on tie trunks with TN722A or later TN760B or later TN767 TN464 any suffix TN437 TN439 TN458 or TN2140 circuit packs This entry must correspond t...

Page 1324: ...endpoint in an IP application this field will display T00000 Valid entries Usage Up to 10 characters Examples of good names The phone number assigned to incoming trunks The Trunk Circuit Identificati...

Page 1325: ...ber of members administered in the trunk group Type The Type column appears when the Trunk Type field is blank or cont The Type column does not display if the Trunk Type field is dis This field specif...

Page 1326: ...l Plan Report screen Matching Pattern The number you want Communication Manager to match to dialed numbers Len The number of user dialed digits the system collects to match to the dialed string Valid...

Page 1327: ...e Extension Number Portability ENP node number Uniform Dial Plan Table The Uniform Dialing Plan field must be y on the System Parameters Customer Options screen before you can administer this table Th...

Page 1328: ...r of digits taken from the locations prefix on the Locations screen These digits are prepended to the dialed string The value for x must less than or equal to the number of digits in the location pref...

Page 1329: ...r of user dialed digits the system collects to match to this Matching Pattern This number must be greater than or equal to the number entered in the Matching Pattern field Valid entries Usage 0 9 1 to...

Page 1330: ...estination for LDN See the Avaya Communication Manager Contact Center Call Vectoring and Expert Agent Selection EAS Guide for more information Field descriptions for page 1 Figure 380 Vector Directory...

Page 1331: ...ervice Routing BSR if this field is y on the original VDN the BSR Application and Available Agent Strategy of the new VDN will be used If this field is n on the original VDN the BSR Application and Av...

Page 1332: ...the System Parameters Customer Options screen the BCMS field must be y for the Measured field to be set to internal or both In addition the appropriate CMS release must be administered on the Feature...

Page 1333: ...o collect digits a 1 second delay or play an announcement Since Meet Me vectors are always configured with announcements and digit collections this should rarely be an issue Name This is an optional f...

Page 1334: ...igure 381 Vector Directory Number AUDIX Name Only appears for DEFINITY R and S8700 IP Connect configurations If this VDN is associated with the AUDIX vector enter the name of the AUDIX machine as it a...

Page 1335: ...tions is in effect A route to number or route to digits vector command routes an EAS direct agent call with coverage option set to y An adjunct routing step routes a direct agent call with the coverag...

Page 1336: ...ter Call Work ACW when the call drops When the administered time is over the agent automatically becomes available This field has priority over the Timed ACW Interval field on the Hunt Group screen Va...

Page 1337: ...or someone dialing in via remote access trunks Valid entries Usage 6 digit number or blank Enter a 6 digit access code for the Meet me Conference VDN If you do not want an access code leave blank Onc...

Page 1338: ...Screen Reference Vector Directory Number 1338 Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager November 2003...

Page 1339: ...coming trunks Use partitioning for groups with different routing due to special billing needs groups that have dedicated use of a particular network facility groups in different businesses serviced by...

Page 1340: ...Automatic Alternate Routing call and accordingly uses the ARS or AAR digit analysis and digit conversion tables to route the call Detailed description This feature allows additional calling options F...

Page 1341: ...led with a prefix as a longer number than the administered extension number An internal extension is the normal extension number 3 5 digits as administered on a station The following general rules can...

Page 1342: ...CA is triggered even if users use ARS AAR Dialing without FAC to reach extensions that are on the same switch Automatic Callback on Busy or Answer This feature works on calls placed using ARS AAR Dial...

Page 1343: ...MCT feature displays the internal extension of an on switch malicious caller Priority Calling This feature works on calls placed using ARS AAR Dialing without FAC which terminate on the originating sw...

Page 1344: ...thout FAC is used for on switch calls Security Violations The internal extension must be entered for the voice terminal to be notified if a Security Violation occurs even if ARS AAR Dialing without FA...

Page 1345: ...types of abbreviated dialing lists personal group system enhanced Your switch type and version determines which lists you have available and how many entries you can have on each list You can assign u...

Page 1346: ...umber lists and determine which users can access the list Considerations You cannot remove a telephone or attendant if it is designated as the extension number that is permitted to program a group num...

Page 1347: ...supported key consists of a hand held encryption generating device ASG Key The key response generator device is pre programmed with the appropriate secret key to communicate with corresponding ASG pro...

Page 1348: ...ee Using Access Security Gateway on page 332 for instructions Administration change notification You can use Administration Change Notification to notify adjunct systems when administration data on Co...

Page 1349: ...me switch Two endpoints in the same private network but on different switches One endpoint on the controlling switch and another endpoint off the private network In all configurations administer the A...

Page 1350: ...switch establishes 2 or more ACs at the same time the switch arranges the connections in order of priority AC attempts can fail for the following reasons Resources are unavailable to route to the des...

Page 1351: ...e AC drops prematurely you must invoke either auto restoration or fast retry to determine whether auto restoration is attempted for an active AC If you option AC for auto restoration and the connectio...

Page 1352: ...AC Digital Multiplexed Interface DMI Use DMI endpoints as the destination in an AC DMI endpoints do not have associated extensions so do not use them as the originator in an AC Facility Test Calls The...

Page 1353: ...hat have 40 character displays Detailed description You can select a language for messages that appear on phones and attendant consoles that have 40 character displays You can choose one of five langu...

Page 1354: ...If AFRL is active Travelling Class Mark TCM is also set to a new FRL value and the TCM information recorded in the billing data CDR is the AFRL value not the original TCM CAUTION AFRL impacts AAR and...

Page 1355: ...ck without flashing the hook or entering the feature access code Detailed description With Analog Busy Automatic Callback without Flash when the caller places a call through an analog station and the...

Page 1356: ...it pack Any announcement not administered for barge in can play simultaneously through multiple ports All ports can play the same announcement at the same time and the system can connect multiple user...

Page 1357: ...on options for TN2501AP announcements If you use the TN2501AP circuit pack you can manage announcements through the System Access Terminal SAT Avaya Site Administration ASA a PC running the VAL Manage...

Page 1358: ...e to announcement circuit packs that have built in memory About barge in You can allow callers to begin listening to an announcement after the system has begun playing the message This is called barge...

Page 1359: ...nt circuit packs See the Made Easy Tool for DEFINITY Media Server Configurations for information related to installing and upgrading a system with the TN2501AP See Managing Vectors and VDNs on page 19...

Page 1360: ...ck over the private network to the originating switch This method is extremely accurate but it is not available over most loop start trunks for example central office CO foreign exchange FX and Wide A...

Page 1361: ...s how to administer the Attendant Console screen Console Parameters screen and other system wide screens to enable the feature Attendant Call Waiting Attendant Call Waiting allows an attendant origina...

Page 1362: ...field is assigned and the called telephone is busy the call redirects to the Hunt To Station Assignment Data Privacy Data Restriction Activating Data Privacy or Data Restriction at the called telephon...

Page 1363: ...to the attendant Automatic Route Selection and Automatic Alternate Routing ARS AAR Activating Attendant Control of Trunk Group Access removes the controlled trunk groups from the ARS and AAR patterns...

Page 1364: ...ifies the digits associated with a Hundreds Select button unless it finds no Hundreds Select button is lit in which case it identifies the digits last entered with the Group Select button The system c...

Page 1365: ...ct Inward Dialing services are unavailable To allow your attendant to use serial calling assign a serial cal button on the Attendant Console screen The Attendant Serial Calling feature is valid only o...

Page 1366: ...waiting to continue You administer the timers on the Console Parameters screen Attendant Timers include Unanswered DID Call Timer Specifies how long a direct inward dialing DID call can go unanswered...

Page 1367: ...an attendant if the coverage criteria are met before the Timed Reminder Interval expires However unanswered calls return to an attendant at the expiration of the interval If a call alerts an attendant...

Page 1368: ...be accessed via display or voice synthesizer Property Management System PMS or AUDIX When the system loses synchronization between telephones and message status data use Clear Message Waiting Indicato...

Page 1369: ...le A supervisor is at a desk of an employee and wants to make a call that is not normally allowed by the FRL assigned to that employee s extension The supervisor however can still make the call by dia...

Page 1370: ...ows or denies the call based on the FRL of the originating station COR is used to restrict internal or non AAR ARS calls Authorization codes are given to individual users and provide a method of speci...

Page 1371: ...rization codes were dialed and the caller is given intercept tones Authorization codes impact calling privileges by Changing an outgoing call FRL when it is insufficient to access preferred routing pa...

Page 1372: ...125 for information concerning the sequence of trunk groups in which an attempt is made to route a call See QSIG to DCS TSC Gateway on page 1114 to permit authorized callers from remote locations to a...

Page 1373: ...s suspended when a collect command is encountered When the call becomes active the collect command resumes Inbound Call Management ICM You can use Automated Attendant to collect information that may l...

Page 1374: ...e user can activate automatic callback for the number of automatic callback buttons assigned to the telephone After placing a call to a telephone that is busy or that is not answered the caller simply...

Page 1375: ...ack is administered to individual telephones by their COS and cannot be assigned to the attendant s Multi appearance telephones must have an automatic callback button to activate the feature automatic...

Page 1376: ...operates over a DCS network as if it were on a local switch Expert Agent Selection Users can t activate Automatic Callback to an EAS agent s Login ID They can activate Automatic CallBack to the phone...

Page 1377: ...ingled out as faulty If the counter reaches the administered short holding threshold the system places a referral call If one long call exceeds the long holding time the system makes a referral call Y...

Page 1378: ...of the node that is designated as primary If ACA referral calls are sent off the switch that generates the referral the display and voicing information indicating the failed trunk is lost even if the...

Page 1379: ...System Parameters screen set the Terminal Translation Initialization TTI Enabled field to y and the TTI State field to voice NOTE When a phone is moved if there is any local auxiliary power a power s...

Page 1380: ...g the phone 4 In the same jack plug in a phone that does not have move permission of the same model and series into the same jack The switch treats the new phone as a maintenance replacement and does...

Page 1381: ...one with move permissions is plugged into the port the new DCP phone does not have dial tone The DCP phone s extension does not move to the port The port keeps night service extension Outgoing trunk Q...

Page 1382: ...rty information such as a calling party number or a billing number Inband signaling is when information such as the address digits for the called party is delivered over the same trunk circuit used fo...

Page 1383: ...nt to the CO is determined by the ANI for PBX on PBX_B but the category sent to the CO is determined by the Category for MF ANI field on the Class of Restriction screen for the incoming DCS trunk or b...

Page 1384: ...matic Routing on page 1384 shows you an overview of automatic routing Figure 384 Automatic Routing Figure notes 1 Input from phone public network trunk or private network trunk 2 Analyze digits to det...

Page 1385: ...ce carriers or services ARS like AAR routes private network numbers public network numbers service codes an international number operator access code or an operator assisted dialing number and also ro...

Page 1386: ...1010XXX0 18 18 deny op 1010XXX01 16 24 deny iop 1010XXX011 17 25 deny intl 1XXX555 11 11 deny fnpa 1XXX976 11 11 deny fnpa 18000555 11 11 deny fnpa 1809 11 11 deny fnpa 1900555 11 11 deny fnpa 411 3 3...

Page 1387: ...ARS calls that are routed over ISDN trunk groups Overlap sending sends ISDN call address information one digit at a time instead of all the address information going out in one block This significant...

Page 1388: ...rmine the barrier code length the actual barrier code and the barrier code expiration date on the Remote Access screen You must administer expiration dates and access limits for each of the possible 1...

Page 1389: ...used just like a regular call appearance for most features For example Conference Transfer Hold Drop and Priority Calling can be used from a bridged appearance just as they are used from a regular ca...

Page 1390: ...ll to prevent accidental bridging of an active call If a call terminates at a telephone on an extension number other than the primary extension number for example terminating extension group TEG UCD g...

Page 1391: ...ary extension number regardless of which appearance placed the call On multiappearance telephones the display at a principal shows the same information for a bridged call appearance as it does for a n...

Page 1392: ...on a bridged appearance the extension of the bridge is recorded as the calling called telephone A conference or transfer by a bridging user also appears as though it was performed by the telephone use...

Page 1393: ...d appearance instead of selecting the bridged appearance button This causes the call to terminate on the bridging user s primary extension button and the primary telephone and all bridged appearances...

Page 1394: ...used for the conference before dialing the number Multiappearance telephones Call Waiting Termination applies only to an active call on the primary telephone that has no one else bridged on If one or...

Page 1395: ...tirely on the criteria of the primary telephone This means that a call to the primary telephone that requires call coverage treatment follows the path of the primary telephone and not the path of any...

Page 1396: ...at call on hold the indicator lamp at both the principal s appearance button and the bridged party s appearance button shows that the call is on hold If more than one user is bridged onto the active c...

Page 1397: ...erting A user cannot use an abbreviated dialing FAC after using a priority calling FAC Privacy Manual Exclusion Exclusion prevents any other user from bridging onto the call Activation of exclusion by...

Page 1398: ...er alone on a bridged call can transfer the call using normal transfer procedures Any attempt by the primary telephone user to bridge onto this call during a successful transfer attempt is ignored and...

Page 1399: ...to the extension number trunk group or paging zone You can assign extension numbers trunk group access codes and Loudspeaker Paging access codes to a Busy Indicator button The Facility Busy lamp indi...

Page 1400: ...of the extension or trunk access code and member number If the number is not a telephone extension DDC UCD group extension ACD split number or trunk access code with a valid member number the system d...

Page 1401: ...at the member s telephone Processes the call as a normal attendant originated call Verification is complete Anyone can place a call to the member s telephone All activated Make Busy Generates reorder...

Page 1402: ...ority call the call does not go to coverage Call Forwarding Busy verification made to an extension with call forwarding activated does not busy verify the forwarded to extension Only the called extens...

Page 1403: ...re Button Assignments verify Display Language Station screen multiappearance phones Button Feature Button Assignments verify Display Language Call admission control bandwidth limitation In order to en...

Page 1404: ...andwidth required to access an announcement if that announcement requires WAN resources The ability to listen to an announcement shall be blocked if the WAN bandwidth limits are exceeded Since there i...

Page 1405: ...1 like packet which is allocated 110 Kbits per second of bandwidth This is the only type of non voice bearer traffic that the CAC BL feature takes into account The CAC BL feature does not apply to the...

Page 1406: ...ccount for calls being shuffled between IP direct and IP TDM states This calculation of bandwidth usage takes into account what network regions the endpoints are in and what network regions the VoIP r...

Page 1407: ...tion Manager Contact Center Guide to ACD Contact Centers for information on using Calling Party Number and Billing Number with Automatic Call Distribution ACD and Inbound Call Management Complete all...

Page 1408: ...ficiency by distributing traffic over all the available trunks Then you can assign services that are used on incoming and outgoing Call by Call Service Selection calls The system provides traffic meas...

Page 1409: ...ed to administer Call by Call Service Selection You administer Call by Call Service Selection on a per trunk group basis The following list shows the required screens and the fields you must use on ea...

Page 1410: ...ple SETUP messages for incoming and outgoing calls classified only by a called party number do not contain an NSF IE Transit Network Selection Indicates which interexchange carrier is to be used on an...

Page 1411: ...ations the call is treated according to the corresponding following 4 columns If an incoming call matches more than one set of specifications the most restrictive case applies The following table list...

Page 1412: ...presenting the cost of a call it is recorded as either a charging or currency unit Periodic Pulse Metering for non ISDN trunks Periodic Pulse Metering PPM accumulates pulses transmitted from the publi...

Page 1413: ...ro is the last charge information received or the outgoing trunk group is not administered for AOC or PPM Charge Display and CDR Avaya Communication Manager provides two ways for you to view call char...

Page 1414: ...requency of updates also affect performance Normally the update frequency should match the average rate at which call charge updates are received from the public network CAUTION Updating displays too...

Page 1415: ...one that has charge display capability the caller will see the charges for the redirected call Call Park When a user parks a call the display mode returns to Normal If a user retrieves a parked outgoi...

Page 1416: ...lic network the private network does not pass call charge information to these branches Electronic Tandem Network ETN In any configuration where a branch system has no direct connection to the public...

Page 1417: ...rovide tone detection ports including the capability to do call classification There are 8 ports on each circuit pack For countries using the USA tone plan a Call Classifier Detector or Tone Clock Cal...

Page 1418: ...g a call means determining the state of the call at its final destination That means whether the call was answered received busy reorder intercept special information tone SIT or other treatment Call...

Page 1419: ...ssign lead coverage paths directly in the Coverage Path 1 or Coverage Path 2 fields on the appropriate screens For example to assign a lead path for a TEG set the Coverage Path field on the Terminatin...

Page 1420: ...ents are in an auxiliary state the group is considered busy and the call routes to coverage Queued calls remain in queue for the Don t Answer Interval A call will not cover to a hunt group if no agent...

Page 1421: ...so that no calls redirect all incoming calls terminate at the principal s phone unless Send All Calls is activated Also Send All Calls allows covering users to temporarily remove their phones from an...

Page 1422: ...on signal a short burst of ringing when the call routes to coverage Redirection Notification is optional on a per phone basis Note that in the Active Cover All Calls and Don t Answer cases the princip...

Page 1423: ...to get the message This method is used when an external call is received or when an internal caller wants to leave a message but is not available for a return call Coverage Answer Group A Coverage An...

Page 1424: ...est to the latest There are no gaps in the activation times the entire day is covered If you do not assign a lead coverage path to a specific time interval there is no coverage from that time until th...

Page 1425: ...ities on the public network When the Coverage of Calls Redirected Off Net Enabled field on the System Parameters Coverage Forwarding screen is y The system monitors off net calls call classification a...

Page 1426: ...ging split for call answer operation and to allow the caller to leave a message for the called principal The same VDN also can be used to retrieve messages The vector program may also be varied by tim...

Page 1427: ...th call redirection to covering users having a close working relationship with the principal Because of the status of the principal personalized answering should be provided Also the principal may or...

Page 1428: ...ry s phone Specify a Coverage ICI button if the secretary does not have a call display Send All Calls is needed if the secretary is unavailable for a period of time Consult is needed to enable private...

Page 1429: ...no answer conditions and to return for further call coverage processing under those conditions However if the principal does not have a coverage path the system does not track the call and it is left...

Page 1430: ...k function does not activate or deactivate Send All Calls Direct Outward Dialing DOD Coverage of Calls Redirected Off Net competes with DOD for call classifier ports when DOD uses MFC signaling The Ca...

Page 1431: ...administered to allow an SBA of the call to either remain at or be removed from the covering phone after the principal bridges onto the call An SBA is maintained for calls covered by an off net cover...

Page 1432: ...overage Table screen See Station on page 1157 for information on assigning feature buttons See Terminating Extension Group on page 1242 for information on assigning a coverage path to a Terminating Ex...

Page 1433: ...Dialing Account Code Dialing allows certain calls to be associated with a particular project or account number To do this users enter account codes when they place certain types of outgoing calls Thes...

Page 1434: ...quired by the trunk group s COR PCOL Remote access without barrier codes Trunk to trunk connections Call Splitting Call splitting keeps track of calls where more than two parties are involved These ca...

Page 1435: ...hich point B drops off the call This produces a record for segment A B A C and D continue to talk for another 5 minutes All remaining parties drop producing two more records A C and A D Note that each...

Page 1436: ...drop Switch party A 51234 calls public network party B 5659999 They talk for 5 minutes A then transfers the call to switch party C 54444 Attendant call recording Both incoming and outgoing call splitt...

Page 1437: ...ince these do not apply Some calls may seem to be intraswitch CDR calls but actually result in trunk calls For example a station to station call to an extension that is forwarded to an outgoing trunk...

Page 1438: ...or helping to find network problems The primary and secondary ports work independently Each port will work even if the link to the other port is down If a link is down for more than a minute some data...

Page 1439: ...Expand Unformatted and Customized on page 1439 Table 33 Date record format for Printer and Expanded on page 1439 and Table 34 Date record format for TELESEER 59 Character Int Proc Int Direct and Int...

Page 1440: ...rogrammed to accept these formats Consult your Avaya representative before using a custom record format Table 34 Date record format for TELESEER 59 Character Int Proc Int Direct and Int ISDN Position...

Page 1441: ...Space 4 5 Time of day hours 6 7 Time of day minutes 8 Duration hours 9 10 Duration minutes 11 Duration tenths of minutes 12 Condition code 13 15 IXC 16 18 Access code used 19 33 Dialed number 34 38 Ca...

Page 1442: ...2 Condition code 13 16 IXC code 17 19 Access code used 20 34 Dialed number 35 39 Calling number 40 54 Account code 55 ISDN NSV units 56 FRL 57 59 Incoming circuit ID 60 62 Outgoing circuit ID 63 Featu...

Page 1443: ...58 Outgoing circuit ID 59 Carriage return 60 Line feed 61 63 Null Table 39 CDR data format printer 1 of 2 Position Data Field Description 1 2 Time of day hours 3 4 Time of day minutes 5 Space 6 Durati...

Page 1444: ...coming circuit ID 77 Space 78 80 Outgoing circuit ID 81 Space 82 Feature flag 83 Carriage return 84 Line feed Table 40 CDR data format ISDN printer 1 of 2 Position Data Field Description 1 2 Time of d...

Page 1445: ...Space 67 68 INS hundreds tens 69 Space 70 INS units 71 Space 72 FRL 73 Space 74 76 Incoming circuit ID 77 Space 78 80 Outgoing circuit ID 81 Space 82 Feature flag 83 Carriage return 84 Line feed Tabl...

Page 1446: ...e 18 21 Access code used 22 Space 23 37 Dialed number 38 Space 39 43 Calling number 44 Space 45 59 Account code 60 Space 61 67 Authorization code 68 Space 69 71 ISDN NSV 72 Space 73 FRL 74 Space 75 77...

Page 1447: ...minutes 9 Duration tenths of minutes 10 Space 11 Condition code 12 Space 13 15 Access code dialed 16 18 Access code used 19 Space 20 34 Dialed number 35 Space 36 39 Calling number 40 Space 41 45 Accou...

Page 1448: ...led 9 11 Access code used 12 26 Dialed number 27 30 Calling number digits 2 5 for 5 digit dial plan 31 35 Account code first 5 digits 36 42 Authorization code or digits 6 12 of account code 43 44 Spac...

Page 1449: ...s 1 5 36 42 Authorization code or digits 6 12 of account code 43 44 INS or digits 13 14 of account code 45 INS 3rd digit FRL or digit 15 of account code 46 Calling number 1st digit of 5 digit calling...

Page 1450: ...ag 50 52 Outgoing circuit ID tens units hundreds 53 Incoming circuit ID hundreds 54 FRL 55 Carriage return 56 Line feed 57 59 Null Table 46 CDR data format Expanded 1 of 3 Position Data Field Descript...

Page 1451: ...ce 83 85 Outgoing circuit ID 86 Space 87 Feature flag 88 Space 89 90 Attendant console 91 Space 92 95 Incoming trunk access code 96 Space 97 98 Node number 99 Space 100 102 INS 103 Space 104 106 IXC 1...

Page 1452: ...e of day hours 3 4 Time of day minutes 5 Space 6 Duration hours 7 8 Duration minutes 9 Duration tenths of minutes 10 Space 11 Condition code 12 Space 13 16 Access code dialed 17 Space 18 21 Access cod...

Page 1453: ...92 95 Incoming TAC 96 Space 97 98 Node number 99 Space 100 102 ISDN NSV 103 Space 104 107 IXC code 108 Space 109 BCC 110 Space 111 MA UUI 112 Space 113 Resource flag 114 Space 115 118 Packet count 11...

Page 1454: ...s 8 Duration tenths of minutes 9 Condition code 10 13 Access code dialed 14 17 Access code used 18 32 Dialed number 33 42 Calling number 43 57 Account code 58 64 Authorization code 65 66 Space 67 FRL...

Page 1455: ...ime of day minutes 5 Duration hours 6 7 Duration minutes 8 Duration tenths of minutes 9 Condition code 10 13 Access code dialed 14 17 Access code used 18 32 Dialed number 33 42 Calling number 43 57 Ac...

Page 1456: ...e feed 117 119 Null Table 50 CDR data format Int process 1 of 2 Position Data Field Description 1 2 Format code 3 4 Time of day hours 5 6 Time of day minutes 7 Duration hours 8 9 Duration minutes 10 D...

Page 1457: ...9 Carriage return 80 Line feed 81 83 Null Table 51 CDR data format Int Direct 1 of 2 Position Data Field Description 1 2 Day of month 3 4 Month 5 6 Year 7 Space 8 9 Time of day hours 10 11 Time of day...

Page 1458: ...78 Outgoing circuit ID 79 Carriage return 80 Line feed Table 52 CDR data format Int ISDN 1 of 3 Position Data Field Description 1 2 Time of day hours 3 4 Time of day minutes 5 Space 6 Duration hours 7...

Page 1459: ...Incoming circuit ID hundreds 79 Incoming circuit ID tens 80 Incoming circuit ID units 81 Space 82 84 Outgoing circuit ID 85 Space 86 Feature flag 87 Space 88 89 Attendant console 1st digit 90 Space 91...

Page 1460: ...uted over When the dialed and used access code are the same this field will be blank If you use ISDN or enhanced formats with TELESEER LSU or Printer record types this field always shows the access co...

Page 1461: ...it is the first digit of a 5 digit dialing plan In formats where the field is less than 7 digits this also shows the TAC of the incoming call This field shows the calling party number in Unformatted o...

Page 1462: ...alls which have been served on a delayed basis via the Ringback Queuing feature 9 I Identifies an incoming or tandem call or an incoming or tandem NCA TSC A Identifies an outgoing call B Identifies an...

Page 1463: ...ion Code overrides If two condition codes apply to the same call one code overrides the other The following matrix Table 54 Condition code override matrix on page 1464 defines the overrides To use thi...

Page 1464: ...K 4 4 4 N A 6 4 4 4 4 4 4 N A N A J K 6 6 6 6 N A 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 0 1 4 6 N A 7 9 7 B C E F J K 8 N A N A 4 6 7 N A N A 8 B C E N A N A K 9 N A 9 4 6 9 N A N A N A N A C E F N A N A A N A 1 4 6...

Page 1465: ...TAC for a Look Ahead Interflow LAI For example A successful LAI to TAC 1001 where 1001 is the remote VDN extension will yield 1001E or 1001 in the Dialed Number field The or E is used by the vector pr...

Page 1466: ...uthorization code is not used to make the call this field contains the originating telephone user s FRL If the call is an outgoing call and an authorization code is used to make the call this field co...

Page 1467: ...oming TAC in trk code 4 digits This field contains the access code of the incoming trunk group INS 3 digits This field specifies the ISDN Network Service requested for a call This field applies only t...

Page 1468: ...a 7 digit IXC code this field contains a 0 Line Feed 1 character The ASCII line feed character follows a carriage return to terminate CDR records MA UUI 1 digit Message Associated User to User Signal...

Page 1469: ...t Count See Packet Count TSC Flag tsc_flag 1 digit This field describes call records that pertain to temporary signalling connections When not equal to 0 this field will indicate the status of the TSC...

Page 1470: ...sequence of 9999 is recorded in the CDR record to indicate that the call was in progress during a time change Dial plan If the dial plan supports 6 7 digit extensions only the formats that already sup...

Page 1471: ...call to an extension the attendant may dial an account code before dialing the extension number It is not possible to option the attendant for intraswitch calls Intraswitch records are produced for a...

Page 1472: ...ed otherwise Condition Code 7 applies The ARS access code is recorded in the Access Code Dialed field and the trunk access code for the trunk group actually used is recorded in the Access Code Used fi...

Page 1473: ...umber of the station that is covered to the remote location Call Forwarding All Calls When a call is forwarded to another extension the extension number dialed by the calling party is recorded as the...

Page 1474: ...intraswitch CDR to a VDN which ends up an outgoing call on an outgoing trunk Such calls will not generate intraswitch CDR records the CDR record will have a condition code A outgoing Call Waiting Ter...

Page 1475: ...wers until both the originator and terminator drop from the call If the attendant originates the conference only the dialed numbers corresponding to intraswitch optioned extensions stimulate the creat...

Page 1476: ...or LDN calls is the extension number or trunk group access code to which the attendant completes the call If the call terminates at the attendant console only the dialed number is the attendant extens...

Page 1477: ...ppearance A CDR record is not affected by any second or subsequent use bridging a call Temporary Signaling Connections TSCs Call associated TSCs and TSC requests appear in the call record provided the...

Page 1478: ...period of time If Incoming Trunk Call Splitting is active a trunk to trunk transfer produces a record of the incoming call and a record of the outgoing call The outgoing call record shows the duratio...

Page 1479: ...ll Forwarding at the forwarded from extension on a per call basis so the user can initiate a call or transfer a call back to the forwarded from extension Detailed description You assign Call Forwardin...

Page 1480: ...rom redirecting off net until the timer either expires or is cancelled The rationale for this mechanism is to prevent calls that were redirected off net from being re routed back to the original princ...

Page 1481: ...ge criteria are satisfied when applied at B Are not forwarded to extension C There is no maximum number of calls that can be forwarded simultaneously You can administer a phone to receive a redirectio...

Page 1482: ...all Forwarding screen Interactions Answer Detection This feature shares call classifier resources with the Coverage of Calls Redirected Off Net feature Attendant Override of Diversion Features If an a...

Page 1483: ...ly been answered off net If forced entry of account codes is required calls cannot be forwarded to off net destinations Call Forwarding All Calls and Call Forward Busy Don t Answer Call Forwarding All...

Page 1484: ...ch Leave Word Calling LWC LWC cannot be activated toward a phone that has Call Forwarding activated If LWC was activated before the called phone user activated Call Forwarding the callback call attemp...

Page 1485: ...put a call on hold and then retrieve the call from any other telephone within the system You can set a system wide expiration interval for parked calls If a call is not answered within the interval t...

Page 1486: ...ition must remain open for the retrieving party Calls cannot be parked on a group extension If a group member places a call in Call Park the call is parked on the member s extension Group members can...

Page 1487: ...lls to paging zones cannot be parked Music on Hold If a parked call involves only one party the parked user hears music on hold The parking user also hears music after first parking the call and heari...

Page 1488: ...goes off hook and dials the Call Pickup access code or presses a Call Pickup button If a user s telephone has a Call Pickup button and status lamp then The status lamp lights steadily when Call Pickup...

Page 1489: ...up group You grant users permission to have their calls answered or to answer others calls with Directed Call Pickup on a per telephone basis on the Class of Restriction screen Considerations A teleph...

Page 1490: ...ll pickup group as the forwarded from telephone If Temporary Bridged Appearance on Call Pickup is not enabled a temporary bridged appearance is not maintained Call Pickup Alerting If a user who is a m...

Page 1491: ...ed the call is answered automatically An extension that has IAA cannot automatically answer calls to other telephones in its call pickup group IAA eligible calls to an IAA extension cannot be answered...

Page 1492: ...e idle even if Call Waiting Termination is not activated However an attendant handled call receives busy tone unless the Attendant Call Waiting Indication field is set to y You assign Call Waiting Ter...

Page 1493: ...Media Server uses its processor CLAN feature The S8100 Media Server with a CMC1 Media Gateway confiuration and S8100 Media Server with a G600 Media Gateway configuration use a TN799DP Control LAN cir...

Page 1494: ...the same entries in a configuration file There is no difference between setting them through one user interface versus the other Tagging is administered through the bash command line as follows vlanc...

Page 1495: ...e and receive Your system may have only a single COR a COR with no restrictions or as many CORs as necessary to effect the desired restrictions You will see the COR field in many different places thro...

Page 1496: ...oreign exchange FX and Wide Area Telecommunications Service WATS calls are routed to the attendant DID calls are routed to an announcement or the attendant Telephone calls are routed to intercept trea...

Page 1497: ...r different facilities such as a telephone and a trunk group Miscellaneous trunk restrictions You can use miscellaneous trunk restrictions to prohibit users from accessing specific trunk groups such a...

Page 1498: ...ctly to an inward restricted or public restricted extension but cannot be extended by an attendant to an inward restricted telephone Transfer Incoming trunk calls cannot be transferred to an inward re...

Page 1499: ...Stations that are Call Pickup points Interactions for miscellaneous terminal and trunk restrictions AAR ARS AAR or ARS access to a trunk group overrides miscellaneous trunk restrictions Abbreviated D...

Page 1500: ...for a group of telephones Attendant Control COR Interactions Call Coverage Controlled Restrictions are not checked for covering users Call Forwarding Controlled Restrictions for the forwarded to exte...

Page 1501: ...ocess for the active call You can allow users to abort a conference operation that is in progress by hanging up the phone You set this parameter with the Abort Conference on Hang Up field on the Featu...

Page 1502: ...number is part of the customer s Direct Inward Dialing DID block NOTE If the vector for Meet Me conferencing allows a new party to join a conference immediately and that party is joining as an H 323...

Page 1503: ...h Public Network Trunks Conference Parties Without Public Network Trunks Conference Tone Abort Conference Upon Hang Up Co Resident DEFINITY Local Area Network Gateway Co Resident DEFINITY Local Area N...

Page 1504: ...urations use the MAPD for CVLAN applications only For S8100 Media Server configurations the Co Resident DLG can use the C LAN TN799 the Processor Card TN2314 or both the C LAN and Processor Card as it...

Page 1505: ...every user must respond to every call The calls may not necessarily queue in the order in which they were made If you have administered the system so that only one user must respond the first crisis...

Page 1506: ...at you consider the display for emergency notification when you complete the name field on the Station screen Put the most important identifying information at the beginning of the field Tenant Partit...

Page 1507: ...is associated with the PBX code and is used to select an AAR pattern for the call This information is required for each PBX code The 3 digit RNX can be an AAR location code or for ENP calls an ENP co...

Page 1508: ...nsions Uniform Dial Plan The following limitations apply to a DCS environment Extensions that differ in length from the UDP do not distribute to other media servers or switches You can use only a sing...

Page 1509: ...hones indirectly obtain their location number A location number is administered on the Network Region screen that applies to all phones in that IP region If a location field is left blank on a Network...

Page 1510: ...t only administer the shortend extension but also administer the announcements on the Announcements Audio Sources screen using the correct type settings for the application Announcement Administration...

Page 1511: ...attendant group is allowed per switch unless you have attendant partitioning This feature does provide a way to support multiple local centralized answering points The LCAPs do not utilize attendant...

Page 1512: ...egistered LSPs the save trans lsp IP address command where IP address is the IP address of a specific LSP This command locally saves the translations and performs a filesync operation to the specified...

Page 1513: ...calls If the phone is a single line analog you have to set this on the Station screen for each user Detailed description You can administer system wide distinctive ringing cycles for the three basic...

Page 1514: ...ce grade DS1 tie trunks Alternate voice data AVD DS1 tie trunks Robbed bit AVD RBAVD DS1 tie trunks Digital Multiplexed Interface DMI tie trunks Integrated Services Digital Network Primary Rate Interf...

Page 1515: ...an Tie DMI BOS C02 1 24 robbed bit CO DID Tie 1 23 24th is D chan isdn pri4 4 Mixed mode signaling is allowed This means that if the signaling mode is isdn ext or isdn pri a port from that circuit pac...

Page 1516: ...ts on each channel in a DS1 facility The least significant bit in every 6th transmitted information frame is removed and replaced by a signaling bit This technique is also called in band signaling The...

Page 1517: ...d according to P10 20 called Euronumeris None 13 a Germany FTZ 1 TR 6 German National PRI None 13 b Germany ETS 300 102 Restart 14 Czech Republic Slovakia ETS 300 102 Restart 15 Russia CIS ETS 300 102...

Page 1518: ...nsion to Cellular provides this capability regardless of the cell phone s cellular service provider or the cellular standard in use Feature Name Extensions FNE Once connected a cell phone or SIP phone...

Page 1519: ...supports call waiting Extension to Cellular can be administered to deliver a second call to the cell phone while it is busy on another call The cell phone features for example swapping calls or confe...

Page 1520: ...tension to Cellular OPS cell phone call to the switch to appear as a local extension on the switch The Mapping Mode field on the Stations with Off PBX Telephone Integration screen for administration c...

Page 1521: ...ould realize that an unanswered call might result in a voice mail message in either mailbox Class of Restriction COR For calls toward a Extension to Cellular OPS station COR restrictions are applied n...

Page 1522: ...access number dialing the Select Idle FNE After hearing dial tone the user enters the FAC Feature name extensions FNE When Extension to Cellular OPS is enabled a user can activate a Communication Man...

Page 1523: ...d information to aid public safety agencies in responding quickly with the appropriate assistance Information about the calling party can be triggered by the transmission of a Caller s Emergency Servi...

Page 1524: ...te to the correct Public Service Answering Point PSAP What you should do To ensure that a media gateway in a separate location which has a different PSAP than does the main server running Avaya Commun...

Page 1525: ...cal exchange carrier jurisdictions then the following administrative scenarios would apply 1 If you are using a Central Office trunk from the gateway to the central office follow the procedure describ...

Page 1526: ...ponds to the street address that the system owner arranged to have administered into the ALI database This assumption is not always true Users who have H 323 IP telephones can move them without notify...

Page 1527: ...length of time depends on which load of software the customer is running If you are notified after an IP extension moves update the ALI database with the extension s physical location You should also...

Page 1528: ...ange 3 3 3 Communication Manager would never detect a move of a telephone from 1 1 1 to 2 2 2 Non ARS calls This feature relies on ARS digit analysis to classify the call as an emergency or crisis ale...

Page 1529: ...mergency access redirection extension No Attd No active attendants are available to receive the call tries to redirect the call to an emergency access redirection extension Redirected Answered Call is...

Page 1530: ...tendant Emergency calls have priority over other calls to an individual attendant only if they are assigned a higher priority on the Console Parameters screen Inter PBX Attendant Service For branches...

Page 1531: ...ansfer the terms are synonymous Detailed description Emergency Transfer allows analog telephones 500 or 2500 type to access the local CO and to answer incoming calls during a power failure Each server...

Page 1532: ...redirected calls Extended User Administration of Redirected Calls allows you to change your lead coverage path or your call forwarding from any local on site or remote off site location SECURITY ALER...

Page 1533: ...out a security code or from any on site or off site location with a security code COR The COR controls the use of the change coverage option of Extended User Administration of Redirected Calls This me...

Page 1534: ...int before the second pound sign The system provides dial tone and you can begin the command sequence at the point of entering your extension You should not enter the FAC again The interrupted command...

Page 1535: ...Administration of Redirected Calls FAC is dialed or the request is denied If the FAC is being dialed on site the tenant number of the station or attendant must have access to the tenant number of the...

Page 1536: ...don t support Non Facility Associated Signaling Brief Description D Channel Backup with NFAS When NFAS is used a backup D channel can be administered to improve reliability The system switches to the...

Page 1537: ...signaling for more than one ISDN PRI facility D Channel Backup requires the use of NFAS At any given time one of the two D channels is carrying Layer 3 signaling messages while the other D channel is...

Page 1538: ...nd NFAS Coordinate the following when implementing FAS and NFAS Decide which T1 E1 facilities will use FAS Decide which of the remaining T1 E1 facilities carries D channel signaling information on the...

Page 1539: ...NFAS the DS1 screen must be submitted first followed by the Interface Link and associated forms followed by the ISDN PRI trunk group Signaling Group and Trunk Group Members screens The Interface Link...

Page 1540: ...Trunk Group for Channel Selection _____ Trunk Brd Interface ID Trunk Brd Interface ID 1 1B15 0 11 ____ __ 2 1B16 1 12 ____ __ 3 1B17 2 13 ____ __ 4 ____ __ 14 ____ __ 5 ____ __ 15 ____ __ SIGNALING G...

Page 1541: ...this link Processor Channels screen Used to assign processor channels to the link administered on the Interface Links screen Finally trunk ports are added to the ISDN PRI trunk group and to Signaling...

Page 1542: ...used for a call then a TCM is outpulsed as the last digit If the intertandem tie trunk FRL is equal to or greater than the terminating FRL the call continues If the originating FRL is less than the t...

Page 1543: ...of assignments always use FRL 0 or 1 for a trunk group that everyone can access If you use a range of 0 5 in one pattern use the same range in another pattern if all users can access the first choice...

Page 1544: ...e such as a modem from a modem pool to complete the call Detailed description GRS recognizes one or more BCC for each trunk group preference in the route pattern BCC defines the type of information be...

Page 1545: ...ode 0 data call uses preference 2 regardless of what trunks are available in the first preference Data modules and GRS For all endpoints Communication Manager automatically determines its current oper...

Page 1546: ...et 2 2 Modular Processor Data Module 0 1 2 1 2 4 Modular Processor Data Module M1 For ACCUNET Switched 56 kbps Service 1 1 Modular Trunk Data Module 2 2 Digital Terminal Data Module 2 2 510D Personal...

Page 1547: ...ing See Interactions on page 1547 for features that block group pages Controlling access to paging groups Each paging group is assigned a class of restriction so you can provide or deny access to diff...

Page 1548: ...turb If a member of a page group activates Do Not Disturb that member does not receive pages Go to Cover The Go to Cover feature is ignored because group pages do not follow coverage Hold The originat...

Page 1549: ...s how to administer the Attendant Console screen and Hospitality screen to enable the hospitality features Attendant Room Status Attendant Room Status allows the attendant to see whether a room is occ...

Page 1550: ...digit number from outside of the hotel For calls from inside the hotel callers would use either the room extension number or the 2 to 5 digit DID number For example when a check in is done from Commun...

Page 1551: ...the front desk set a wakeup time Users with rotary dial phones call the front desk to request a wakeup call Activate Automatic Wakeup either by dialing the FAC or by pressing the automatic wakeup ent...

Page 1552: ...a wakeup call request at any time Display Prompting with Dual Wakeup On Display prompting with Dual Wakeup works the same as Display Prompting with Dual Wakeup off described in the previous text excep...

Page 1553: ...information Type of event Request A new wakeup call request is made Change The time is changed on an existing wakeup call request Cancel A wakeup request is canceled Move To The wakeup request for th...

Page 1554: ...egrated message functionality the announcement keeps repeating from when the first guest of a group of guests receiving the same wakeup announcement at the same time goes off hook until the last guest...

Page 1555: ...ers Hospitality screen is y You also need to set up a number of stations as xdidvip enter xdidvip in the Type field on the Station screen When you use the vip chkin button on a display phone to check...

Page 1556: ...speech synthesizer circuit pack Button Access If a phone has a Do Not Disturb button the user can press the button to activate the feature The handset may be on hook or off hook The user presses the b...

Page 1557: ...the only limit on the number of users receiving voice prompting Interactions Automatic Callback Do Not Disturb does not block an Automatic Callback call Return calls terminate at a phone in the normal...

Page 1558: ...st security hotels do not divulge guests room numbers to other guests or callers For this reason do not assign display equipped phones to guest rooms Check In Communication Manager performs the follow...

Page 1559: ...ion and Guest Information Input Change messages contain call coverage path numbers These numbers do not display but are used to configure the appropriate call coverage arrangements for guest extension...

Page 1560: ...Room Swap the name originally associated with the first terminal is changed or swapped to the second terminal along with call coverage path automatic wake up entries message waiting status and control...

Page 1561: ...I characters Transparent protocol mode supports a complete ASCII character set Controlled Restriction Activated via console button Activated via PMS terminal Normal Transparent or ASCII mode Do Not Di...

Page 1562: ...MS databases The system failed momentarily destroying its record of room status therefore a data exchange is needed to synchronize Communication Manager and the PMS databases When the PMS link is down...

Page 1563: ...striction Outward restriction Total restriction Station to station restriction Termination restriction Combined outward and termination restriction Combined outward and station to station restriction...

Page 1564: ...ons to normal operation A Check In Check Out request sends information for Names Registration to Communication Manager This information includes the guest s name room extension and call coverage path...

Page 1565: ...Message Waiting Notification for guests patients However if you do not use Message Waiting Notification Integrated Message Center Service is used for both Do not remove an extension while the PMS lin...

Page 1566: ...han one phone with one check in command whether from your PMS or from Communication Manager When a room phone is checked in Communication Manager looks for a hunt to extension associated with that sta...

Page 1567: ...the call to that extension A hunt group is especially useful when you expect a high number of calls to a particular phone number A hunt group might consist of people trained to handle calls on specifi...

Page 1568: ...rage for a hunt group Then if a hunt group queue is full the system sends new calls to the coverage point If a call goes into a hunt group queue it stays in queue for the Coverage Don t Answer interva...

Page 1569: ...uncement If the delay announcement interval expires before the Don t Answer interval the call connects to a delay announcement If the announcement is already in use the delay announcement interval is...

Page 1570: ...ystem considers the agent to be available and still will queue calls Hunt Group member dials the Hunt Group Busy Activate feature access code Hunt Group Busy If you turn on the Hunt Group Busy option...

Page 1571: ...hone or attendant console When a member receives a call for the hunt group associated with the ICI button the button s status lamp lights ACD agents as hunt group members Do not include ACD split agen...

Page 1572: ...tension in the hunt group or an announcement Charging for the call if applicable then begins Interactions Attendant Call Waiting Attendant Call Waiting does not work for calls that the attendant sends...

Page 1573: ...odules on page 732 for information about and field descriptions on the Announcement circuit pack See Coverage Path on page 720 for information on automatic redirection of calls to answering positions...

Page 1574: ...en added to the group you allow users to make intercom calls by administering one or both of the following feature buttons on their phones Phones with one or both of these features can belong to the s...

Page 1575: ...ls Call Coverage Intercom calls do not follow a coverage path unless the caller activates Go To Cover Call Forwarding Intercom calls cannot be forwarded off net Call Pickup Directed Call Pickup Interc...

Page 1576: ...hat the system redirects because of a queue overflow of Emergency Access to the Attendant calls Calls when the receiving station s Active Station Ringing field is set to continuous IAA Feature Operati...

Page 1577: ...on has IAA active Call Coverage If an internal call is redirected to another telephone by Call Coverage redirection criteria then that call is eligible for IAA at the redirected telephone IAA does not...

Page 1578: ...ember are eligible for IAA Distributed Communications System DCS If a call is from an internal telephone on another server switch in a DCS configuration then that call is considered internal and is el...

Page 1579: ...rcuit or packet switched connections within a network and can link to other ISDN supported interfaces to provide national and international digital connections NOTE This manual does not contain proced...

Page 1580: ...ical layer is either DS1 T1 or E1 The DS1 T1 used in North America and Japan is a digital transmission standard that carries traffic at the rate of 1 544 Mbps and the E1 used in Europe carries traffic...

Page 1581: ...includes a table that outlines these switched network services An ISDN trunk group may be dedicated to a particular feature Alternately an ISDN call by call trunk group may provide access to several...

Page 1582: ...to Host Call Identification enables CPN and BN information to be passed from Communication Manager to the ISDN Gateway so that the ISDN Gateway can forward the information to a host for data screen d...

Page 1583: ...re used to connect the DCS nodes Most DCS features are not affected by ISDN PRI However there is a minor impact on a few of the DCS features as far as the functions that the local and remote media ser...

Page 1584: ...ation Non Facility Associated Signaling ISDN PRI only D Channel Backup ISDN PRI only Wideband Switching ISDN PRI only Call by Call Service Selection Calling Line Identification Calling Line Identifica...

Page 1585: ...pes of trunk or station facilities on a call See the figure below for an example of interworking Figure 394 ISDN and non ISDN interworking In this example a call for someone at Switch B comes into Swi...

Page 1586: ...work may provide either the CPN or BN as the calling party s number Extensions and 12 digit international numbers display without dashes Dashes are only used for 7 digit and 10 digit numbers when Nort...

Page 1587: ...NUM MISCID Called Party Display This is the display of the party the caller originally dialed If this party bridges onto the redirected call after it has been answered they see a CONFERENCE 2 In this...

Page 1588: ...nerally available ISDN AT T Network service Malicious Call Trace MCT ISDN calling number identification is sent when MCT notification is activated on an ISDN trunk Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Limit...

Page 1589: ...S Calls field is y on the Feature Related System Parameters screen BRI trunks support DCS if using a BX 25 link to transport the DCS messages DCS also known as DCS Over ISDN D Channel according to the...

Page 1590: ...ype of call for example voice or data See Look ahead routing on page 1594 for information on balancing call volume across a network by automatically rerouting ISDN calls to other media servers or swit...

Page 1591: ...ociated with all Coverage Message Retrieval buttons in the system flash These lamps continue to flash until the stored message level falls below 85 percent Authorized retrievers can selectively delete...

Page 1592: ...h of time You can administer the system to play a special howler tone before locking an analog extension by setting the Station Tone Forward Disconnect field to busy on the Feature Related System Para...

Page 1593: ...runks How the system routes incoming DID trunk calls to the attendant group Incoming DID calls route only to an extension The LDN feature allows you to assign one or more extensions to an attendant gr...

Page 1594: ...time If the current preference fails twice the next routing preference is tried LAR can be administered at an origination server switch or a tandem server or switch It can be turned off at different...

Page 1595: ...n be used to route the call LAR measurement You can measure the number of attempted and successful LAR reroutes The Measurements LAR Route Pattern screen displays LAR measurements for a particular rou...

Page 1596: ...Loss plans Loss plans determine the amount of loss quieter or gain louder applied on calls Usually your system uses a pre defined loss plan that is based on the administered country code In some circu...

Page 1597: ...ystems and allow users to page from their phones You can administer up to 9 separate zones sets of loudspeakers on Communication Manager so an announcement can be made to one group or location without...

Page 1598: ...g user is conferenced with the parked caller and both are connected in a 3 way conference with the paged user when he or she responds In other words Meet Me conferencing is standard operation for user...

Page 1599: ...PCOL or a redirected call with a temporary bridged appearance the maximum number of off hook parties on the call is five instead of six The sixth position is reserved for the answer back call Call Co...

Page 1600: ...park calls on a group extension by dialing the extension as a call park destination Transfer Paging calls can t be transferred Chime paging Abbreviated Dialing Don t use special characters in abbrevi...

Page 1601: ...r via the connected Auxiliary Trunk s control signal interface Activating MCT To activate MCT while on an active malicious call perform one of the following Push an MCT Activate feature button Place t...

Page 1602: ...ber displays Otherwise the incoming trunk equipment location displays In this case the user must call the connecting media server or switch For all calls Communication Manager displays the called numb...

Page 1603: ...s in on a non ISDN trunk the controller needs the telephone number for the connecting media server and a cross reference of system trunk port numbers including DS1 channel number if appropriate not th...

Page 1604: ...ol q sig When the ISDN trunk group is Country Protocol 2 notification is sent only to the public network Make Busy Position Busy Send All Calls Communication Manager attempts to activate Make Busy or...

Page 1605: ...ndling to ensure that callers are not left on hold indefinitely with no way to reach someone for assistance or that callers are not dropped by the system See Misoperation Alerting and Intercept Treatm...

Page 1606: ...classified as Type 1 when it is answered Call Type 2 An incoming external public network call is classified as Type 2 before it is answered A misoperation cannot occur with a Type 2 call because an un...

Page 1607: ...hold re alert as if the Held Call Timed Reminder had expired 3 When the calls start re alerting a timer starts The timer is set to the value assigned in the Alerting sec field on the Console Paramete...

Page 1608: ...ves intercept treatment If the options are compatible the system obtains a modem from the appropriate pool If a modem is not available the user receives reorder treatment The system can detect the nee...

Page 1609: ...ions made by the customer Each data call that uses Modem Pooling uses four time slots not just two As a result heavy usage of Modem Pooling could affect TDM bus blocking characteristics Tandem servers...

Page 1610: ...MFC is a version of MFC recommended by the International Telecommunication Union ITU It provides signaling between a CO and a media server over analog or digital CO DID or DIOD trunks It also provide...

Page 1611: ...group II MF signaling call the call can route to a group II MF signaling trunk Both incoming and outgoing MF signaling calls support ANI The terminal displays ANI information and the CDR record record...

Page 1612: ...making the call is the origination server the one answering the call is the destination server The origination server switch creates forward signals classified as group I and group II signals The dest...

Page 1613: ...nteractions ASAI ANI collected from incoming R2 MFC signaling can be used with ASAI Abbreviated Dialing Although calls dialed automatically from an abbreviated dialing privileged list complete without...

Page 1614: ...he agent is logged in ANI prefix and ANI truncation apply to logged in EAS agents Hunt Groups and Automatic Call Distribution ACD Splits For ANI a physical terminal s extension number and COR override...

Page 1615: ...its Tandem Offnet Calls If ANI digits are received on incoming MFC calls the ANI digits are sent to outgoing tandem off net calls For Russia Only The ANI is requested on incoming trunks only when all...

Page 1616: ...s is equal to the maximum number of port networks supported or is limited to a single location if on the System Parameters Customer Options screen the Multiple Locations field is n Using multiple loca...

Page 1617: ...help in another part of the country the 911 staff that you are talking to have no fast way to relay your comments to a PSAP near where you are located If you describe your location as out of state yo...

Page 1618: ...Priority Routine the default and lowest precedence level Each station user is administered with a maximum precedence level the more important the user higher the precedence level Users cannot originat...

Page 1619: ...PP include Blocked precedence call Unauthorized precedence level attempted Service interruption prevented call completion Busy not equipped for Premption or Precedence Call Waiting Vacant code Line Lo...

Page 1620: ...ending on the state of that appearance Preselection Before lifting the handset to place or answer a call the user can press a call appearance button or a feature button to select an appearance when th...

Page 1621: ...le Appearance Preference Select Last Used Appearance NAT and NAT Shuffling Network Address Translation NAT devices transparently translate IP addresses in a given addressing realm into IP addresses in...

Page 1622: ...utton on the principal attendant console or designated console Night Station Service Night Station Service directs incoming calls for the attendant to designated extensions Attendants can activate Nig...

Page 1623: ...the Night Service Disconnect Timer interval the incoming trunk disconnects In addition a user can assign all the trunk groups to the night service mode at the same time Then all the trunk groups are i...

Page 1624: ...od of time to avoid locking up the trunk The call is not routed to the DID LDN night extension Considerations for TAAS If Night Service is active and a power failure occurs the system when brought bac...

Page 1625: ...elayed first announcement ringback music on hold or silence and a second announcement Call Coverage Coverage takes precedence over Night Service When Hunt Group Night Service is active the NSE s norma...

Page 1626: ...group Tenant Partitioning Each tenant may have a designated night service station The system directs calls to an attendant group in night service to the night service station of the appropriate tenant...

Page 1627: ...ple if hunt group A has a forced first announcement assign the incoming CO trunk to terminate at hunt group A Assign the incoming trunk s night service destination to be another hunt group hunt group...

Page 1628: ...night service destination See Station on page 1157 for administering feature button assignments on stations See Setting up night station service on page 180 for instructions For Trunk Group Night Ser...

Page 1629: ...ance information for the various voice terminal types see the user guide for the appropriate telephone Detailed description Off Premises Station requires cross connecting capabilities and one port on...

Page 1630: ...ministration a ready indication tone will play to all the parties on the call the initiator only or none of the parties After enough of the conversation has been recorded the initiator can then stop t...

Page 1631: ...another party The recording shall continue If two calls both have AUDIX recording in progress conferencing the two calls together will be denied Coverage Answer Group An answer group contains up to e...

Page 1632: ...ference parties may use selective Display Drop to drop the AUDIX hunt group extension number from the call The LED will go off Mode Code Interface Since voice mail connections via mode code interface...

Page 1633: ...Platform product family These products are used with Avaya Communication Manager to provide users of IBM compatible PCs fully integrated voice and data workstation capabilities Detailed description Tw...

Page 1634: ...oup 2 shown in Figure 396 ISDN BRI PC interface configuration Group 2 on page 1635 uses PC ISDN Interface cards up to four cards which plug into expansion slots on the PC These cards each provide 2 st...

Page 1635: ...to 4 separate PC ISDN Interface cards on the same PC Assign each card a separate extension and assign each extension one or more appearances The availability of specific features depends on the COS of...

Page 1636: ...ally are initializing terminals and require you to assign an Service Profile Identifier SPID The PC ISDN Platform Group 2 in a stand alone configuration is a noninitializing BRI terminal and does not...

Page 1637: ...r different users to use the same bank of phones at different times For example several telecommuting or hoteling employees can use the same office on different days of the week The employees use PSA...

Page 1638: ...overage point is a display phone the display shows da for don t answer If the coverage point is a voice messaging system the VM system receives an indication from Communication Manager that this call...

Page 1639: ...than to a person who needs to work in multiple locations should not use PSA Such a station should not have PSA in its COS Save Translations PSA commands cannot be successfully executed during a save t...

Page 1640: ...essages and 15 adminstrable custom messages Detailed description The system messages will be automatically sent to other systems through QSIG by sending out the corresponding message numbers if QSIG f...

Page 1641: ...sting mode This is especially important for stations without display equipment When a call is made to the telephone which is in the message posting mode the selected message will be displayed on the c...

Page 1642: ...t displays for the PSA enhancements feature when the station is PSA associated Transfer When a call is made to a station which is already in message posting mode then the display of the posted message...

Page 1643: ...nctive default is three burst ringing signal Call Forwarding All Calls Priority Calling calls except callback calls are forwarded and the forwarded call remains a priority call Call Vectoring The syst...

Page 1644: ...ictation Access cannot be used with the following features Automatic Route Selection Conference Related topics See Audible message waiting on page 1368 for information about letting users know they ha...

Page 1645: ...t from unauthorized access Detailed description Remote Access provides you with access to the system and its features from the public network This allows you to make business calls from home or use Re...

Page 1646: ...ied For each barrier code the command displays Date the code was administered reactivated or modified Expiration date Number of calls that can be placed with the code Number of calls that have been pl...

Page 1647: ...e to each person responsible for protecting the code Changing codes Change codes often Deleting codes Delete codes when they are no longer needed Monitoring codes Use CDR reports to analyze code use A...

Page 1648: ...See Trunk Group on page 1256 for information about and field descriptions on the Trunk Group screen Remotely readable electronic phone IDs Remotely readable electronic identification allows Communicat...

Page 1649: ...ate Routing AAR If a user dials the AAR feature access code followed by destination digits to place a call and the destination is busy reset shift dial tones is heard If the user then dials a new dest...

Page 1650: ...ion originated call Multimedia Call Handling If a user at a multimedia complex presses the mm call button or dials the multimedia origination feature access code after receiving dial tone and then rea...

Page 1651: ...e transition of the alerting that is from ringing to silence or from silence to ringing This feature is most useful in bridging situations in which some users want to be Audibly alerted to a call imme...

Page 1652: ...for the Ringing Abbreviated and Delayed feature of the station being used by the agent Data Extension Calls Data Extension calls are not affected by the ring values but continue to be directed by the...

Page 1653: ...ed by Ringer Cutoff NOTE If Call Coverage is set to Cover All and Ringer Cutoff and Redirect Notification are both active then Redirect Notification is received If Redirect Notification is not active...

Page 1654: ...ing If Ringer Cutoff is active Manual Signaling still rings the user s telephone Ringback Queuing If Ringer Cutoff is active the return call for Ringback Queuing still rings the user s telephone with...

Page 1655: ...e submitted If you know that during an 8 hour period about 30 invalid codes are submitted you might set the threshold to count a security violation when 40 invalid codes are submitted within eight hou...

Page 1656: ...the attempt was made where available On a historical basis the number of security violations of each type as well as other security measurements are collected and displayed in the Security Violations...

Page 1657: ...by an announcement message or must route to bridge appearances equipped with a display module SVN referral calls that do not have an announcement and terminate to a bridged appearance not having a dis...

Page 1658: ...use a Trunk Access Code or Dial Access Code to originate an SBS call Proper administration and configuration is required for the SBS feature to work You must administer the Local Country Code and Inte...

Page 1659: ...for the SBS bearer call The SBS bearer call will only be measured if the bearer trunk group is administered to be measured and the only events that will be measured on the bearer call will be the trun...

Page 1660: ...D of the SBS signaling call and will indicate the trunk ID of the signaling not the bearer trunk An example of this would be the status station x command This command issued against a station on an SB...

Page 1661: ...dpoint characteristics as the real originator The contents of the Incoming Call Identification ICI display for an SBS call is obtained from the SBS signaling call not the bearer call The Class of Rest...

Page 1662: ...cations Interface ASAI Interactions When using Call Classification after Answer calls should not be routed using SBS because the Call Classifier must be on the bearer trunk and there will be interfere...

Page 1663: ...e from a Call Center and the call is using SBS to call another Communication Manager system the call will be affected by the normal SBS call setup delays Outbound Calling over SBS trunks must not use...

Page 1664: ...information will be tandemed with the call Vector Routing Tables may use SBS trunks for routing calls Incoming SBS calls will still provide VDN of Origin announcements VOA and displays to the agent an...

Page 1665: ...SBS call can invoke Remote Access by means of a vector collect or route to SBS does not support Wideband Switching NxDSO Russian Incoming ANI via button will not display the ANI received in the SBS be...

Page 1666: ...ate the length of the SBS extension at the SBS terminating node this number of digits will be extracted from right to left and sent in the Calling Party Subaddress Information Element Administration f...

Page 1667: ...ry Service Protocol field on both the trunk group form and the signaling group form must be set to b QSIG This is necessary because some QSIG features such as QSIG Call Completion and QSIG Message Wai...

Page 1668: ...he descriptions of SBS related fields on Communication Manager screens such as Trunk Group on page 1256 and Signaling Group on page 1140 Service observing Designated users normally supervisors can lis...

Page 1669: ...ate waiting for an eligible call the only visual indication the station agent is observing is if the observing station has a Service Observe button administered When this happens the Service Observe b...

Page 1670: ...parties on a call when they are being observed you can choose between a warning tone and conference tone If you select warning tone a unique 2 second 440 Hz warning tone plays before an observer conn...

Page 1671: ...Observers do not hear users dialing when the latter use this feature Distributed Communications System DCS To observe stations on another node a DCS station extension you must set up remote access ser...

Page 1672: ...de up of a prefix and an extension up to five digits The prefix identifies the call type Communication Manager collects dialed digits removes the prefix digit and uses the extension for further proces...

Page 1673: ...otel services extensions 1 through 7 2 digit access to 70 hotel motel services extensions 10 through 79 Guest room extensions for floors 1 through 7 extensions 100 through 799 Toll calling access via...

Page 1674: ...com lists A TAC and an extension can share a first digit only if the extension is shorter than the TAC Although extensions with the same first digit can have different lengths data channel extensions...

Page 1675: ...gh the chain as follows There is no limit to the number of extensions that can be in a station hunting chain Station Hunting examples In this example Table 62 Station Hunting chain Example 1 on page 1...

Page 1676: ...is busy the system follows the station hunting chain to find an idle extension The system encounters extension 3 a second time without finding an idle station The system stops checking the station hu...

Page 1677: ...nsion When you duplicate a station the extension in the hunt to station field is not copied into the duplicated station When you execute list usage extension xxxxx the system displays all stations tha...

Page 1678: ...he system forwards the call If a busy station has Call Forwarding active a call to the station forwards If the forwarded to station is busy the call follows that forwarded to station s hunting chain I...

Page 1679: ...essage is left at the called extension even if the system uses Station Hunting in an attempt to complete the call Multimedia Calls to multimedia endpoints must convert to voice before station hunting...

Page 1680: ...y locked and unlocked Station Lock allows users to lock their phones to prevent unauthorized outgoing calls block outgoing calls and still receive incoming calls block all outgoing calls except for em...

Page 1681: ...SSC provide security to you by preventing other users from accessing functions associated with your station Each station user can change their own SSC if they know the station s current settings You...

Page 1682: ...ny uses Button display modes You can assign several display modes to phone buttons Users access these modes by pressing the assigned button on the phone All the buttons are administrable Button Mode D...

Page 1683: ...lays END OF FILE PUSH Next TO REPEAT when in Retrieval mode Delete deletes the currently displayed message Call Disp automatically returns the call requested by the currently displayed message or the...

Page 1684: ...active on a call and receives a subsequent call the display automatically shows the identification of the subsequent caller for a few seconds then automatically restores the display associated with t...

Page 1685: ...y attendant console if the retriever is in the user s Call Coverage path and if permission to retrieve messages is assigned for the user s phone Display Meaning b Busy The called user is active on a c...

Page 1686: ...letters Ukrainian contains the characters required to display the Ukrainian language All Ukrainian characters appear in capital letters The type of phones your company uses must support the character...

Page 1687: ...Monitor 1 and OneVision Monitor 1 and OneVision receive ASCII characters OSSI OSSI displays the literal value of the display field not the enhanced characters Passageway Direct Connect Not supported V...

Page 1688: ...DEM REVEIL REFUSEE SANS AUTORISATION SVEGLIA NON ATTIVATA NON PERMESSO ENTRADA DENEGADA SIN PERMISO WAKEUP ENTRY DENIED SYSTEM FULL DEM REVEIL REFUSEE ENCOMBREMENT SVEGLIA NON ATTIVATA CONGESTIONE EN...

Page 1689: ...tion of terminals and trunks English French Italian Spanish ALL MADE BUSY TOUS OCC TUTTI OCCUPATI TODAS OCUPADAS BRIDGED EN DERIVATION OCCUPATO PUENTEADA DENIED INTERDIT NON PERMESSO DENEGADO INVALID...

Page 1690: ...OCC E Entree ligne occupe occ I Occupato Intrusione OCUP I Ocupada intrusion ringing Extension Ringing SONNE Libre libero Libero LIBRE Libero wait Extension Busy Intrusion Not Allowed Call Waiting Al...

Page 1691: ...t available English French Italian Spanish SORRY TIME UNAVAILABLE NOW HEURE ET DATE INDISPONIBLES ORA E DATA TEMPON DISPONIBILI HORA Y FECHA NO DISPONIBLE S AHORA DATE TIME TIME b b DATE TIME HR MIN b...

Page 1692: ...n Spanish DO NOT DIST Group xx Time xM NE PAS DERANGER GROUPE xx HEURE NON DISTURBARE Grp xx Ora NO MOLESTAR GRUPO xx HORA DO NOT DIST Ext xxxxx Time xM NE PAS DERANGER POSTE xxxxx HEURE NON DISTURBAR...

Page 1693: ...ANNULEE NON DISTURBARE RICHIESTA CANENTRYATA MUCHAS GRACIAS SOLICITUD CANCELADA Table 76 Field separator English French Italian Spanish calling party to called party calling party a called party call...

Page 1694: ...TEL INDISPONIBLE INTENTE DESPUES NO MATCH TRY AGAIN INTROUVABLE REESSAYER NESSUNA CORRISPONDENZ A RIPETERE NO CORRESPONDE INTENTE DE NUEVO Table 78 ISDN English French Italian Spanish ANSWERED BY REP...

Page 1695: ...rt DOPO IL TONO DI CENTR OBTENGA TONO OPRIMA RECUP MNSJE COBERT IN PROGRESS EN COURS ATTENDERE EN CURSO MESSAGE RETRIEVAL DENIED LECTURE DE MESSAGES INTERDITE LETTURA MESSAGGIO NON PERMESSA RECUPERACI...

Page 1696: ...ENCION ADA MCT activated by for DAM ACTIVE par pour RCM attivato da per RLM activada por para original call redirected from redirection appel initial de EXTENSION chiamata iniziale rinviata da llamada...

Page 1697: ...UNT GROUP x NOT ADMINISTERED GROUPE DE DIST x NON ADMINISTRE GRUPPO x NON AMMINISTRATO GRUPO BUSQUEDA x NO ADMINISTRADO Table 84 Queue status indication English French Italian Spanish 15 chrs Q time x...

Page 1698: ...riction vers postes cd Controllata Derivati CS Control estacion ct Controlled Termination Restriction AR Restriction d arrivee ct Controllata Terminante RE Restriccion entrante db DID Find Busy Statio...

Page 1699: ...E Controle cntr op Controllo Operatore CONTROL Control ICOM Intercom Call INTERCOM Intercommunicati on ICOM Intercom INTERF Llamda interfono OTQ Outgoing Trunk Queuing FFD File faisceaux de depart RFO...

Page 1700: ...a R Reenvio de llamada b Cover Busy o Suppleance occupee o Copertura per Occupato o Cobertura ocupada d Cover Don t Answer n Suppleance pas de reponse n Copertura per Non Risposta n Cobertura sin resp...

Page 1701: ...IN ERRATO REGISTRARSE FALLIDO CHECK OUT Ext DEPART POSTE CHECK OUT Tel PAGAR LA CUENTA EXTENSION CHECK OUT COMPLETE MESSAGE LAMP OFF DEPART PAS DE MESSAGES CHECK OUT COMPLETATO NESSUN MESSAGGIO PAGO T...

Page 1702: ...h Italian Spanish Barrier Code Violation VIOLATION DU CODE D ENTREE VIOLAZIONE DI CODICI DE TAGLIO VIOLACIAON CONDIGO LIMITE Login Violation VIOLATION DE L ACCES A L ADMINISTRATION IOLAZIONE DI INIZIO...

Page 1703: ...lso below is the table that lists the 3 letter abbreviations for the day of the week Table 90 Special codes English French Italian Spanish m Mark M Marquer m Marcato M Marca p Pause P Pause p Pausa P...

Page 1704: ...ON OLD ROUTE PLAN x ENTER NEW PLAN ACHEMINEMENT ANT x ENTRER NOUVEAU INSTRADAMENTO PREC x INTROD IL NUOVO PLAN RUTAS ANT x INTRODUZCA EL NUEVO OLD ROUTE PLAN x NEW PLAN y ACHEMINEMENT ANT x NOUVEAU PL...

Page 1705: ...isplay terminal in the order in which you enter them If you want the display to read right to left enter the characters in reverse order on the screen US English to Russian characters Table 95 Transfe...

Page 1706: ...vaya Communication Manager November 2003 US English to Japanese characters Table 97 US English to Japanese characters 1 of 2 Japanese US English Japanese US English space space 8 9 A B C D E F G 0 H 1...

Page 1707: ...vember 2003 For Japanese the z and characters map to Kanji characters as follows z symbol for 1 000 symbol for 10 000 symbol for Yen W m X n Y o Z p p q q q r s W t _ u a S v a p w b b x x m d y y s e...

Page 1708: ...S English to European characters Some of the characters in the following map appear in only upper or lower case for example and others Table 98 US English to European characters 1 of 2 European US Eng...

Page 1709: ...splays Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager 1709 November 2003 U m V n W o X p Y q Z r s t u v _ w x a y b z d e f g Table 98 US English to European characters 2 of 2 European US Engl...

Page 1710: ...try Options for more information about and field descriptions on the System Parameters Country Option screen See Changing the Display Language for information about displaying the Russian Japanese Eur...

Page 1711: ...appearance is maintained at the called telephone The called party can answer the call at any time even if it is already answered by a covering user If the called party does not bridge onto the call th...

Page 1712: ...ed from bridging onto a call A user who attempts to bridge onto a call when this feature is active is dropped Tenant Partitioning Not available with Offer B Tenant Partitioning provides telecommunicat...

Page 1713: ...onsole screen Tenant Partitioning capabilities Tenant Partitioning can provide the following services to tenants telephone equipment building wiring public and private network access and attendant ser...

Page 1714: ...eed to be placed in its own partition so that both tenants can access it It is also important to consider the following constraints and requirements of access control attendant services music sources...

Page 1715: ...ns 2 15 to individual businesses in the complex You maintain the system default restrictions for these tenants That is tenants cannot access telephones trunking facilities or other Communication Manag...

Page 1716: ...in tenant partition 2 makes an out going call using tenant partition 1 s trunk groups the caller will hear the music source assigned to tenant partition 1 If the COR of the called extension does not...

Page 1717: ...ing AAR Service Observing Uniform Dial Plan The function of any feature that specifies a tenant partition is affected by tenant to tenant restrictions as follows Automatic Alternate Routing AAR ARS Do...

Page 1718: ...ut on hold the music on hold is the music source assigned to the tenant partition of the terminal that was originally called Call Detail Record CDR CDR does not report the tenant partition number of t...

Page 1719: ...a tenant partition Multiple Audio Music Sources for Vector Delay When an audio source is specified by a wait time time hearing treatment vector step the audio source assigned to the tenant number of...

Page 1720: ...user in the group can answer the call Detailed description You can administer any phone as a TEG member however only a multiappearance phone can be assigned a TEG button with merged status lamp The T...

Page 1721: ...eligible Leave Word Calling Leave Word Calling messages can be stored for a TEG and can be retrieved by a member of the group a covering user of the group or a system wide message retriever Phone Disp...

Page 1722: ...d on the digital telephone Once the TTI merge has been completed for the attendant console the digital telephone must be unplugged and the attendant plugged into the jack An attendant console can be s...

Page 1723: ...port field of a BRI set that is still connected to the server running Communication Manager You must use the TTI separation sequence from the set Analog Queue Warning Ports and External Alert Ports Th...

Page 1724: ...s the group as a result of a TTI merge a PSA associate or a port assignment that telephone is excluded from all transactions already active in the call coverage answer group Call Forwarding A telephon...

Page 1725: ...ding to the time of day and day of the week You need to define the route pattern you want to use before you set up time of day routing You can route calls based on the least expensive route and you ca...

Page 1726: ...rnet LINUX Windows 2000 connect through an Ethernet port to these time servers using NTP or SNTP software UTC time then is converted to the local time of the server running Communication Manager ORYX...

Page 1727: ...d APIs are used to express the time in local time Communication Manager code still uses local time However the daylight savings rule for system time is controlled by the OS This is accounted for by us...

Page 1728: ...ions feature to display DST and local time in the case where the system time is set to GMT on the station sets homed on the local port networks However all Communication Manager reports including BCMS...

Page 1729: ...d hang up Multi appearance telephone users press the Transfer button dial the desired extension and press the Transfer button again If on the Feature Related System Parameters screen the Transfer Upon...

Page 1730: ...fields on the CO Trunk Group screen must be set to the same non zero number The Receive Answer Supervision field must be set to n If the CO does provide answer supervision the Answer Supervision Timeo...

Page 1731: ...lephone recall or feature activation callers are not put on hold for transfer they are transferred via Pull Transfer BRI telephones Callers using BRI Stations reach desired parties through an intermed...

Page 1732: ...scription This feature is enabled by administering the Disconnect Supervision Out field to y on at least one outgoing trunk group screen and enabling Trunk to trunk transfer on the Feature Related Sys...

Page 1733: ...t turnaround c If any remaining party is on an incoming trunk accept turnaround For the purposes of this check an outgoing DCS trunk that has been turned around an odd number of times via a DCS trunk...

Page 1734: ...ons for public trunks CO CPE CAS DID DIOD FX and WATS have calls terminated or receive denial If the parameter is set to none all trunk to trunk transfers except CAS and DCS have calls terminated or r...

Page 1735: ...lease the call The attendant can however use the Forced Release button and disconnect all parties associated with the call If a user has connected two outgoing trunks or an outgoing call and an incomi...

Page 1736: ...ing a conference call with a second outside call party which eliminates the need for a second trunk line for the duration of the call NOTE Some analog DTMF telephone sets used in Italy and the United...

Page 1737: ...ith custom services causes complications for the user when tracking a call Communication Manager cannot give the local telephone user status information on the custom services The Trunk Flash feature...

Page 1738: ...ed on your system This chapter contains information about the most common analog and digital trunks Specialized trunks such as Advanced Private Line Termination APLT tandem release link and DMI BOS tr...

Page 1739: ...lation Initialization When you use PSA or TTI to associate a phone with another extension Communication Manager will report the CESID of the extension not the physical phone associated with it CO Cent...

Page 1740: ...intranet NOTE The origin and destination media servers or switches must both have the special hardware and software needed to route telephone calls over IP networks See the Administration for Network...

Page 1741: ...call detail records for all calls if desired Complete control of access to external trunks from any phone Note that a firewall typically would be required to control access to SIP trunks from SIP endp...

Page 1742: ...onomical alternative to the analog tie trunk as well as a high speed fully digital without modems connection between the media servers or switches The maximum per channel data rate for DS1 is 64 Kbps...

Page 1743: ...of the local media server or switch to the distant server or switch In general supervisory signaling has 2 phases Seizure signal The originating office s signal for a request for service from the dis...

Page 1744: ...disconnects another server or switch cannot seize the trunk and be connected to the CO party of the previous call Loop start LS supervision A supervisory signaling scheme used between a telephone and...

Page 1745: ...One tone is from a low group of four frequencies The other tone is from a high group of four frequencies Both tones correspond to digits letters or characters 0 9 A Y or and One of the tones 1 633 Hz...

Page 1746: ...tion Manager for information on the types of circuit packs available and their capacities This manual also lists the maximum number of trunks and trunk groups for each system configuration See Managin...

Page 1747: ...ce for the Deaf but the term TTY is generally preferred in part because many users of these devices are hearing impaired but not deaf TTY callers can be accommodated by creating a hunt group that incl...

Page 1748: ...nt group 47 has already been established and consists of TTY enabled agents If a TTY caller calls the number that connects to vector 33 the following occurs 1 After a short burst of ringing a quick bu...

Page 1749: ...ypes of conversion are supported AAR ARS extension number portability ENP and EXT For AAR and ARS the resulting number is analyzed and routed as a private network AAR or public network ARS number If y...

Page 1750: ...that server If so the call is routed to the station and UDP is not invoked If the extension is not found locally the system checks to see if the extension matches an assigned extension code If the ex...

Page 1751: ...ines the associated RNX 222 and uses AAR to route the call to 222 1234 If the AAR access code and 222 1234 are dialed Communication Manager finds the route pattern for RNX 222 and routes the call to t...

Page 1752: ...on 61234 This same type of call routing occurs when an extension at Media Server B calls an extension at Media Server C If extension 61234 on Media Server B calls extension 61235 Communication Manager...

Page 1753: ...CS software Extension Number Portability ENP If an extension code is administered to use ENP node routing ENP routes the call to the correct server If AAR is enabled in addition to UDP the 7 digit AAR...

Page 1754: ...two locations Users can retrieve LWC messages with Voice Message Retrieval Users can retrieve all other messages with AUDIX If you do not have a TN725B speech synthesizer board non display phone users...

Page 1755: ...ce ports and a data link Communication Manager can also communicate with INTUITY AUDIX without the data link In this case Communication Manager and INTUITY AUDIX communicate by sending and receiving s...

Page 1756: ...laced Assign a restrictive COR COS and FRL to the station lines and trunks serving AUDIX Use CDR reports in Communication Manager to determine if the lines are being used for calls that are normally n...

Page 1757: ...f service for maintenance testing high login activity may be seen for the AUDIX split in the measurement reports On CMS reports that display an agent s login ID AUDIX voice ports always show a login I...

Page 1758: ...ified of the existence of AUDIX messages If the data link between the system and AUDIX is down attempts to activate LWC for an AUDIX covered principal are denied and reorder tone is returned If a call...

Page 1759: ...e 1101 for information about and field descriptions on the Packet Gateway Board screen Complete all fields on this screen to administer Communication Manager for voice messaging See Mode Code Related...

Page 1760: ...or press a feature button then dial the extension of the user they are trying to reach To assign a feature access code enter a code in the Whisper Page Activation Access Code field on the Feature Acce...

Page 1761: ...To Cover Call Coverage For example let s say Call Forwarding All Calls is activated on a phone If there are no active calls a whisper page to that phone will ring at that phone as a priority call For...

Page 1762: ...n t make a whisper page to an extension while it s being busy verified You can t busy verify an extension while it s making or receiving a whisper page Calling Restrictions Origination Phones with thi...

Page 1763: ...party and paged party must be on the same media server or the attempt is denied Tenant Partitioning Whisper paging is permitted across tenant partitions if the assigned classes of restriction allow fo...

Page 1764: ...l to accommodate the extra bandwidth requirement Avaya Communication Manager serves as a gateway to many types of high bandwidth traffic Wideband switching is also supported by the Expansion Interface...

Page 1765: ...tching at remote locations The following table provides information on Wideband Switching channel types Perform wideband line side channel allocation using one of three allocation algorithms fixed fle...

Page 1766: ...ice versa The terminal adapter also must adhere to the PRI endpoint boundaries as administered on Avaya Communication Manager when handling both incoming to the endpoint applications and outgoing call...

Page 1767: ...service A PE remains in service unless all of its B channels are out of service In other words if B channel 1 is out of service and the PE is five B channels wide the PE could still handle a wideband...

Page 1768: ...endpoint is considered busy Multiple WAEs are separate and distinct within the facility and endpoint applications must be administered to send and receive the correct data rate over the correct DS0s...

Page 1769: ...nication Manager routes the backup data connections over alternate facilities if necessary Networking All of the wideband networking is over ISDN PRI facilities and the emulation of them by ATM CES bu...

Page 1770: ...s are administered within the trunk group If an ISDN trunk group is not optioned for wideband then a cyclical trunk hunt based on the administration of trunks within the trunk group is still available...

Page 1771: ...wband or N x DS0 call attempts to preserve idle quadrants by choosing a trunk s in a partially contaminated quadrant if one exists If a partially contaminated quadrant capable of carrying the call doe...

Page 1772: ...that trunk group is treated as an H0 call and the H0 constraints apply If the H0 constraints cannot be met then the call is blocked N 24 if a trunk group is optioned for both H11 and N x DS0 service...

Page 1773: ...er dropped if negotiation is unsuccessful Outgoing call to network retried on another trunk Outgoing call to user stays up B channel s Wide No negotiation No negotiation Incoming call from network dro...

Page 1774: ...DS0 23 is active reselect DS0 22 for the next call This is known as linear trunk hunting Only the direction of hunt is administrable Interactions Administered Connections Provides call initiation for...

Page 1775: ...ired Forced entry of account codes is turned off for wideband endpoints Class of Service COS COS determines the class of features that a wideband endpoint can activate Facility Associated Signaling FA...

Page 1776: ...RS AAR and Data Terminal Dialing World Class Tone Generation allows you to define call progress tones You can select values for frequency and cadence If you do not define a call progress tone Avaya Co...

Page 1777: ...e the call is answered Abbreviated Dialing AD A feature that allows callers to place calls by dialing just one or two digits AC 1 Alternating current 2 See Administered Connection AC ACA See Automatic...

Page 1778: ...an active notification association communication channel to the adjunct Sometimes referred to as a monitored call active notification domain VDN or ACD split extension for which event notification ha...

Page 1779: ...Connection AC A feature that allows the switch to automatically establish and maintain end to end connections between access endpoints trunks and or data endpoints data modules administration group Se...

Page 1780: ...one line Analog telephones are usually served by a single wire pair tip and ring The model 2500 telephone set is a typical example of an analog telephone analog to digital converter ADC A device that...

Page 1781: ...he organizational structure of a system including hardware and software ARS See Automatic Route Selection ARS ASA Avaya Site Administration ASAI See Adjunct Switch Application Interface ASAI ASCII Ame...

Page 1782: ...auto in trunk group Trunk group for which the CO processes all of the digits for an incoming call When a CO seizes a trunk from an auto in trunk group the switch automatically connects the trunk to th...

Page 1783: ...t way to send a toll call automatic trunk A trunk that does not require addressing information because the destination is predetermined A request for service on the trunk called a seizure is sufficien...

Page 1784: ...the type of a call for example voice and different types of data Determination of BCC is based on the caller s characteristics for non ISDN endpoints and on the Bearer Capability and Low Layer Compat...

Page 1785: ...several sources to any of several destinations business communications terminal BCT A digital data terminal used for business applications A BCT can function via a data module as a special purpose te...

Page 1786: ...n running on an adjunct processor that collects information from an ACD unit CMS enables customers to monitor and manage telemarketing centers by generating reports on the status of agents splits trun...

Page 1787: ...ed condition occurs ASAI cause values fall into two coding standards Coding Standard 0 includes any cause values that are part of AT T and CCITT ISDN specifications Coding standard 3 includes any othe...

Page 1788: ...ng telephone switching equipment that provides local telephone service and access to toll facilities for long distance calling central office CO codes The first three digits of a 7 digit public networ...

Page 1789: ...electrical components are installed A circuit pack is installed in a switch carrier CISPR International Special Committee on Radio Interference Class of Restriction COR A feature that allows up to 96...

Page 1790: ...are not considered contiguous no wraparound For an E1 facility with a D channel DS0s 15 and 17 are considered contiguous control cabinet See control carrier control carrier A carrier in a multi carri...

Page 1791: ...and duplication CSA Canadian Safety Association or Customer Software Administrator CSCC Compact single carrier cabinet CSCN Center stage control network CSD Customer service document CSM Centralized S...

Page 1792: ...a terminal equipment or data communications equipment data path The end to end connection used for a data communications link A data path is the combination of all elements of an interprocessor commun...

Page 1793: ...dial trunk A trunk that allows dialing directly into a communications system digits are received as they are dialed denying a request Sending a negative acknowledgment NAK done by sending an FIE with...

Page 1794: ...I is offered through two capabilities bit oriented signaling DMI BOS and message oriented signaling DMI MOS digital signal level 0 DS0 A single 64 kbps voice channel A DS0 is a single 64 kbps channel...

Page 1795: ...rate as if the network were one system DIVA Data In Voice Answer DLC Data line circuit DLDM Data line data module DMI Digital multiplexed interface DND Do not disturb DNIS Dialed Number Identification...

Page 1796: ...l 1 protocol C DS1 CONV Digital Signal Level 1 converter DSI Digital signal interface DSU Data service unit DTDM Digital terminal data module DTE Data terminal equipment DTGS Direct Trunk Group Select...

Page 1797: ...The E1 facility is divided into 32 channels DS0s of 64 kbps information Channel 0 is reserved for framing and synchronization information A D channel occupies channel 16 E M Ear and mouth receive and...

Page 1798: ...magnetic interference end to end signaling The transmission of touch tone signals generated by dialing from a voice terminal to remote computer equipment These digits are sent over the trunk as DTMF d...

Page 1799: ...des the interface between a PN s TDM bus packet bus and a fiber optic link The EI carries circuit switched data packet switched data network control timing control and DS1 control In addition an EI in...

Page 1800: ...on FEAC Forced Entry of Account Codes feature A specifically defined function or service provided by the system feature button A labeled button on a telephone or attendant console used to access a spe...

Page 1801: ...Level FTC Facility Test Call FTP File Transfer Protocol FX Foreign exchange G G3 MA Generic 3 Management Applications G3 MT Generic 3 Management Terminal G3r Generic 3 RISC Reduced Instruction Set Com...

Page 1802: ...ee Automatic Answer on Intercom high reliability system A system having the following two control carriers duplicate expansion interface EI circuit packs in the PPN in G3r with CSS and duplicate switc...

Page 1803: ...eless fixed bases I3 Interface A proprietary interface used for the DEFINITY Wireless Business System for the cell antenna units Each wireless fixed base can communicate to up to four cell antenna uni...

Page 1804: ...placed from one telephone to another within the local communications system Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN A public or private network that provides end to end digital communications for al...

Page 1805: ...wn as International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee CCITT ITU is an international organization that sets universal standards for data communications including ISDN ITU members are from...

Page 1806: ...en endpoint applications and an ISDN PRI facility ISDN PRI terminal adapters are currently available from other vendors and are primarily designed for video conferencing applications Accordingly curre...

Page 1807: ...the alarm status of circuit packs and the activation of telephone features lightwave transceiver Hardware that provides an interface to fiber optic cable from port circuit packs and DS1 converter circ...

Page 1808: ...on the loop formed by the trunk leads before sending the digits of the called number loss plan The overall plan used in network design and management for creating and maintaining consistent signal str...

Page 1809: ...te attention Major alarms are automatically displayed on LEDs on the attendant console and maintenance or alarming circuit pack logged to the alarm log and reported to a remote maintenance facility if...

Page 1810: ...unt group who takes and retrieves messages for voice terminal users MF Multifrequency MFB Multifunction board MFC 1 Multifrequency code 2 Multi Frequency Compelled MFE Multifrequency Espana MGP Media...

Page 1811: ...ooling serves both outgoing and incoming calls modular processor data module MPDM A processor data module PDM that can be configured to provide several kinds of interfaces RS 232C RS 449 and V 35 to c...

Page 1812: ...tes multiplexer A device used to combine a number of individual channels into a single common bit stream for transmission multiplexing A process whereby a transmission facility is divided into two or...

Page 1813: ...ization NEC National Engineering Center NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer s Association NETCON Network control circuit pack network A series of points nodes or stations connected by communications...

Page 1814: ...used one facility is configured with a D channel and the other facilities that share the D channel are configured without D channels If D channel backup is used two facilities are configured to have...

Page 1815: ...e work state that indicates that an agent is currently active on another split s call or in ACW for another split OTL Originating Test Line OTQ Outgoing trunk queuing OTTOTT Outgoing Trunk to Outgoing...

Page 1816: ...D Packet assembly disassembly paging trunk A telecommunications channel used to access an amplifier for loudspeaker paging party extension active on call A party is on the call if he or she is actuall...

Page 1817: ...e transmission access point on a device that is used for communicating with other devices port carrier A carrier in a multicarrier cabinet or a single carrier cabinet containing port circuit packs pow...

Page 1818: ...ension Endpoint applications have call control capabilities over PRI endpoints principal A terminal that has its primary extension bridged on one or more other terminals principal user A person to who...

Page 1819: ...twork PT Personal terminal PTC Positive temperature coefficient PTT Postal Telephone and Telegraph public network The network that can be openly accessed by all customers for local and long distance c...

Page 1820: ...determines when an incoming call is redirected to coverage Redirection on No Answer An optional feature that redirects an unanswered ringing ACD call after an administered number of rings The call is...

Page 1821: ...T Release link trunk RMATS Remote Maintenance Administration and Traffic System RNX Route number index private network office code ROM See read only memory ROM ROSE See Remote Operations Service Eleme...

Page 1822: ...s information for the angel on its port circuit pack and when polled transmits this information to the archangel SAT System access terminal SBA Simulated bridged appearance SBS Separation of Bearer an...

Page 1823: ...rvisor small computer system interface SCSI An ANSI bus standard that provides a high level command interface between host computers and peripheral devices SMDR Station Message Detail Recording SN Swi...

Page 1824: ...tail Recording CDR standard serial interface SSI A communications protocol developed for use with 500 type business communications terminals BCTs and 400 series printers status lamp A green light that...

Page 1825: ...specified times See also association SYSAM System Access and Administration system administrator The person who maintains overall customer responsibility for system administration Generally all admini...

Page 1826: ...ant TCM Traveling class mark TDM See time division multiplexing TDM TDR Time of day routing TEG Terminating extension group terminal A device that sends and receives data within a system See also admi...

Page 1827: ...nct control or domain control association TOD Time of day tone ringer A device with a speaker used in electronic voice terminals to alert the user TOP Task oriented protocol trunk A dedicated telecomm...

Page 1828: ...UDP 1 User Datagram Protocol Transport layer connectionless unreliable fast 2 Uniform Dial Plan A feature that allows a unique 4 or 5 digit number assignment for each terminal in a multiswitch configu...

Page 1829: ...A hunt group or ACD split administered with the vector field enabled Access to such a split is possible only by dialing a VDN extension VIAS Visually Impaired Attendant Service Virtual Private Networ...

Page 1830: ...s call control for calls originating from wideband access endpoints wink start tie trunk A trunk with which after making a connection with a distant switching system for an outgoing call the system wa...

Page 1831: ...or Avaya Communication Manager 1831 November 2003 write operation The process of putting information onto a storage medium such as a hard disk WSA Waiting session accept WSP WAN spare processor WSS Wi...

Page 1832: ...Glossary and Abbreviations Z 1832 Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager November 2003...

Page 1833: ...ending 1387 AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Table commands 513 AAR and ARS features interactions Uniform Dial Plan UDP 1753 AAR ARS Dialing without FAC 1340 AAS Auto Available Split abandoned call search s...

Page 1834: ...swapping phones After Call Work ACW see Avaya MultiVantage Call Center Software Release 11 Guide to ACD Call Cen ters after call work button 116 Agent Call Handling see Avaya MultiVantage Call Cen ter...

Page 1835: ...Access 1362 attendant crisis alert 120 Attendant Direct Extension Selection DXS 1363 Attendant Direct Trunk Group Selection 148 Attendant Intrusion 1364 Attendant Override of Diversion Features 1365 A...

Page 1836: ...rded announcements 382 1356 barging in with whisper paging 1760 barrier codes 281 1645 7 digit barrier codes 1388 description 1388 basic multimedia complex 262 BCMS VuStats Login ID screen see Avaya M...

Page 1837: ...r 1445 data format enhanced TELESEER data format 1442 data format enhanced unformatted 1455 data format expanded 1450 data format Int process 1456 data format Int direct 1457 data format Int ISDN 1458...

Page 1838: ...ommands 521 description 1495 fully restricted service restrictions 1497 inward restrictions 1496 manual terminating line restrictions 1496 origination restrictions 1496 outward restrictions 1496 publi...

Page 1839: ...Table 539 Route Pattern 539 Security Related System Parameters 539 Signaling Group 540 Site Data 540 Station 540 System Parameters Country Options 541 System Parameters Crisis Alert 541 commands cont...

Page 1840: ...commands 524 Data Module continued data line 429 description 429 digital data endpoints 1607 Ethernet 429 ISDN BRI 421 PPPI 429 processor 429 processor trunk 429 screen 732 system port 429 types 429...

Page 1841: ...Gateway ASG 334 login IDs 346 remote access 316 347 disassociating home stations 313 display capacity commands 513 display charge button 121 Display Messages commands 534 Display Messages Button Label...

Page 1842: ...ty Associated Signaling FAS and NFAS 1536 Facility Restriction Level FRL 213 call originating facilities 1542 call terminating facilities 1543 description 1542 ISDN 1588 security measures 1756 facilit...

Page 1843: ...ernal Automatic Answer IAA ICI button 123 ICLID see Incoming Call Line Identification ICLID ICLID see Incoming Call Line Identification on Analog Trunks Inbound Call Management ICM see Avaya MultiVan...

Page 1844: ...ing 1387 ISDN PRI terminal adapters 444 462 Malicious Call Trace MCT 1588 multiple subscriber number MSN limited 1588 ISDN service continued overlap sending 1588 private networks 1580 public networks...

Page 1845: ...lacing voice pages 1597 restrictions 1599 screen 1059 single line phones 1598 M Magic on Hold system 1712 maid status 1549 Maintenance Related System Parameters see Mainte nance for Avaya MultiVantage...

Page 1846: ...mmands 301 Multiple Application Platform for DEFINITY MAPD see Access Security Gateway ASG Multiple Call Handling MCH see Network Facilities screen see Administration for Network Connectivity for Avay...

Page 1847: ...on 1684 call purpose identifiers 1685 called party identification 1684 calling party identification 1684 phone displays continued enhanced phone displays 1686 mapping enhanced display characters 1705...

Page 1848: ...to ACD Call Centers recall rotary digit 1184 Recorded Announcements 376 barge in capability 382 1356 Recorded Announcements screen see Announcements Audio Sources screen Recorded Telephone Dictation...

Page 1849: ...ts 496 S8700 Media Server continued administration 480 SNMP Agents 493 start stop Master Agent 499 turn on turn off SMMP ports 500 S8700 Media Server logging in remotely over the network 32 saving ann...

Page 1850: ...28 subsequent call coverage redirection interval 1419 Suite Check in 1566 Super retriever extensions 826 superuser 37 supervisor button 116 swapping phones 88 switch communication interface SCI links...

Page 1851: ...setting 39 Time of Day Routing screen 1035 timer button 128 timers attendant 1366 Tip meaning of 25 TOD routing override button 120 125 Toll Analysis commands 543 screen 1248 toll fraud 1470 1756 15 t...

Page 1852: ...Number VDN 208 Vector Routing Table screen see Avaya MultiVantage Call Center Soft ware Release 11 Guide to ACD Call Centers Vector Routing Table see VuStats Display Format screen see Avaya MultiVant...

Page 1853: ...els 1770 H11channels 448 466 H12 channels 448 466 1771 high speed video conferencing 1768 ISDN PRI terminal adapters 444 462 ISDN PRI trunk groups and channel allocation 447 465 ISDN PRI trunk groups...

Page 1854: ...Index X 1854 Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager November 2003...

Reviews:

No comments